mpea 5th floor buildout

205
PROJECT MANUAL MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT Project No: 21.9119.910 330 East Cermak 5th Floor Chicago, Illinois 60616

Upload: others

Post on 20-Jul-2022

2 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

PROJECT MANUAL

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUTProject No: 21.9119.910330 East Cermak 5th Floor

Chicago, Illinois 60616

PREPARED FOR:

PROFESSIONAL SERVICES FIRMS

,

Page 2: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 00 01 03 - CONSULTANTS DIRECTORYSECTION 00 72 00 - GENERAL CONDITIONSSECTION 00 85 00 - LIST OF DRAWINGS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 01 00 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND SUMMARY OF WORKSECTION 01 04 00 - COORDINATIONSECTION 01 04 50 - CUTTING AND PATCHINGSECTION 01 09 50 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONSSECTION 01 15 20 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENTSECTION 01 20 20 - PROGRESS MEETINGSSECTION 01 31 00 - SCHEDULES AND REPORTSSECTION 01 34 00 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLESSECTION 01 37 00 - SCHEDULE OF VALUESSECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICESSECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIESSECTION 01 60 00 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENTSECTION 01 70 00 - PROJECT CLOSETSECTION 01 72 00 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

SECTION 03 54 16 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRYSECTION 06 40 23 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

TO C - 1

MMohnalkar
Typewritten Text
(NOT USED)
MMohnalkar
Cross-Out
Page 3: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPINGSECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMESSECTION 08 12 16 - INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMESSECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORSSECTION 08 41 26 - ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTSSECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARESECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMINGSECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARDSECTION 09 30 00 - TILINGSECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGSSECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIESSECTION 09 65 19 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORINGSECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETINGSECTION 09 68 16 - SHEET CARPETINGSECTION 09 72 00 - WALL COVERINGSSECTION 09 77 13 - STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMSSECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

SECTION 10 44 00 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

SECTION 11 00 00 - EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

SECTION 12 24 13 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

TABLE OF CONTENTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

TO C - 2

Page 4: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING(HVAC)

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 35 - WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE

TABLE OF CONTENTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

TO C - 3

Page 5: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTEGRATION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 42 - PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION ANDSTORAGE EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 45 - INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 48 - ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION

NOT APPLICABLE

TABLE OF CONTENTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

TO C - 4

Page 6: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 00 01 03 - CONSULTANTS DIRECTORY

GENERALPART 1 -

PROJECT LISTING1.1

MEP & Fire Protection Engineer:WMA Engineers815 S Wabash Ave, Chicago, IL, 60605312 786 4310

Acoustical Consultant:Shiner + Associates225 W Washington St, Suite 1625, Chicago, IL, 60606312 849 3340

AV Consultant:Engineering Plus9018 Heritage Pkwy, Woodridge IL, 60517630 242 5200

Furniture Vendor:Space Continuum205 W Wacker Dr, Suite 1700, Chicago IL, 60606312 212 5110

EXECUTION (NOT USED)PART 2 -

END OF SECTION 00 01 03

TABLE OF CONTENTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

TO C - 1

Page 7: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Buildout August 24, 2017

LIST OF DRAWINGS 00850-1

SECTION 00850 LIST OF DRAWINGS The following drawings dated August 24, 2017, FOR BIDDING, accompany and form a part of these Documents.

SHEET NUMBER TITLE

A0.00 Cover Sheet

A00.xx General & Typical Information A01.xx - A06.xx Plans A11.xx Interior Elevations A12.xx Details A13.xx Schedules FP.xx Fire Protection Drawings, Schedules, & Specs Mx.xx Mechanical Drawings, Schedules, & Specs Ex.xx Electrical Drawings, Schedules, & Specs Px.xx Plumbing Drawings, Schedules, & Specs Tx.xx Technology Drawings, Schedules, & Specs

END OF SECTION

Page 8: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-1

SECTION 01010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND

SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Division 1 for this project includes the following Sections:

a. Refer to all specification sections listed in the “Table of Contents” B. Each Section of Division 1 applies to all the Work. 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. The name and location of the Project is: MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout 330 East Cermak Road 5th Floor Chicago, Illinois 60616 B. The Owner of the Project is: Metropolitan Pier & Exposition Authority 301 Cermak Rd. Chicago, Illinois 60616 C. The contract Drawings and Specifications have been prepared by Gensler. D. The project scope generally consists of but is not limited to providing all construction

services, permits, labor, material, equipment, coordination, supervision, scheduling, coordination and related services, necessary and appropriate for complete buildout of interior offices at ABC Building, 330 East Cermak, 5th Floor, Chicago Il 60616 as defined by construction documents.

E. Perform the following at areas indicated on the drawings):

1. Demo existing conduit, piping, etc., as indicated on MEP / FP Drawings

2. Relocate any existing sprinkler piping as indicated on MEP / FP Drawings

3. Build out new office layout as per architectural construction drawings.

Page 9: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-2

F. Work will be performed at locations within the facility as shown on the Drawings and/or as determined by physical conditions discovered during repair. Note: Some work items are described in the Contract Specifications but are not specifically located and/or shown on the Contract Drawings; the Contractor is responsible for locating and marking areas to be repaired and confirmed by the Architect / Engineer.

G. Quantities associated with work items listed on the Bid Form have been estimated by

the Architect / Engineer and are subject to field measurement and verification. The Owner’s Representative and/or Architect / Engineer reserve the right to increase or decrease individual work item quantities at the same unit cost, as required by job conditions.

H. Final payment for work items shall be made on the basis of accepted work as

approved by the Architect / Engineer. 1.3 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate, expedite and schedule all the Work

which shall be done in the proper sequence and at the proper time so as not to cause any delay in the progress of the Work and the completion of the Project.

B. The Contractor shall plan and schedule the Work to allow for the installation of the

Authority's equipment in the Project, the work of separate contractors to proceed, and to allow partial, temporary and beneficial occupancy and use of the Project by the Authority.

1.4 CONDUCTING THE WORK A. The Work shall be conducted so as not to interfere with any of the Authority’s

operations, shows and other contractors, nor to obstruct any thoroughfare or access to buildings or facilities and nor to impede vehicular and pedestrian traffic. Any exception must be specifically requested and authorized by the Authority, in writing.

All work shall be conducted in full accordance with the requirements of the applicable

City, County, State and Federal regulatory bodies. 1.5 COORDINATION OF DRAWINGS A. Layouts of equipment and accessories are diagrammatic except as specifically

dimensioned. The Contractor shall avoid interference between trades, secure maximum head room and clear access to services and equipment and to maximize usable areas.

1.6 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND ARCHITECT B. Correspondence regarding shop drawings, catalog information, and the Contract

Drawings and Specifications shall be carried on directly between the Contractor and the Architect. Copies of all such correspondence and of all shop drawings, catalog

Page 10: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-3

information, drawings, specifications and other documentation and information shall be sent simultaneously to the Authority by the sender.

1.7 STANDARD SPECIFICATION REFERENCES A. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title of a specific standard

such as a Federal Specification, an American Standard Specification, an ASTM Standard, or a trade association standard, shall comply with the latest revision thereof and any amendment or supplement thereto in effect on the date of the Contract, except as limited by these Specifications.

1.8 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment in place, providing all necessary

setting materials and accessories, including concrete, structural steel supports, hangers, bolts, anchors, and other fastening devices, securely erected in place.

1.9 CONSTRUCTION LOADS ON BUILDING STRUCTURES A. If the Contractor desires to place loads in excess of the design loads on any part of

building structures or facilities, he shall first submit drawings and stress calculations prepared by a State of Illinois licensed Professional Structural Engineer of the proposed method for supporting materials for the review and approval by the Authority of the necessary drawings and calculations.

B. Construction load interference with general, mechanical, electrical, and other work shall

be considered in any proposed permanent design. The cost of engineering, and all additional labor and materials required to support loads other than design loads, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.10 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION OPENINGS A. The Contractor shall provide openings in slabs, walls, and partitions, where required for

moving in materials or equipment and shall close and/or restore all openings and finishes after their use. The Contractor shall not make any openings requiring structural modifications without the prior review and approval of the Authority.

1.11 ACCESS AND PARKING A. Access to the site for delivery of construction material or equipment shall be made only

in locations designated by the Authority. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to supply flagmen as required and approved by the Authority.

B. Pedestrian ways, roadways, loading docks and utility access shall not be obstructed. C. Fire hydrants adjacent to the Work shall be kept accessible at all times and no

materials or obstructions shall be placed within twenty (20) feet of any such hydrant, or at a greater distance if required by law or ordinance.

D. Staging areas for the Contractor shall be only as designated by the Authority.

Page 11: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-4

E. Vehicle parking areas for the Contractor’s use will not be provided by the Authority. F. The Contractor shall be responsible for becoming familiar with and for taking into

consideration, the Mayor's Traffic Management Task Force Bulletin, which is a publication of projects and special events in the Chicago area that have a significant impact on traffic. Copies of this Bulletin can be obtained through the Mayor's Traffic Management Task Force, (312) 744-0645.

G. The Authority reserves the right to designate all entry and exit points for the

Contractor's use and by the Contractor's employees and their materials. Access and means of access to construction areas will not be unreasonably withheld.

H. No access will be allowed to the Authority’s facilities except that required to perform

Work under this Contract. 1.12 OCCUPANCY A. The Authority shall be permitted to occupy any completed or partially completed

portions of the Work, during the progress of the Work to the extent possible without interference. Such occupancy shall not in any way indicate completion of the Work or signify the Authority's acceptance of the Work or any part thereof.

B. Any interruption or shut-off of an operational service or utility line shall be done only as

scheduled with and approved by the Authority in writing. 1.13 ADVERTISING A. No on-site advertising or signs of any type will be permitted on any part of the building,

scaffolding, fences, materials, obstructions or site except as may be specifically approved by the Authority in writing.

1.14 SECURITY A. Security of the Work under construction and the contents of buildings are the

responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be limited to the area of the Work and to access routes approved by the Authority. The Contractor shall submit a proposed phasing and security plan within fourteen (14) days after being awarded the Contract and shall illustrate the Contractor's intended plan for accomplishing the Work and maintaining security while not interfering with or adversely affecting the Authority's operations.

1.15 PHASING A. The Work shall be phased in such a manner as to minimize and limit the mixing of the

Contractor’s activities with those of Show Contractors and Users subject to the Work Day Schedule and the requirements and approval of the Authority.

B. The Contractor shall devise its own schedule, phasing, and sequence of work. It is

recognized that certain elements of Work such as pipes, ductwork and conduits may

Page 12: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-5

project into adjacent areas or existing buildings and facilities. Such projections shall be done so as not to interfere with normal usage of those adjacent areas during certain times of Shows and kept to minimum practicable amounts of time.

C. The Work Day Schedule has been provided for the Contractor’s information and is

subject to revision by the Authority at any time. The Contractor must permit access by Show Contractors during show move-ins and move-outs at all times.

D. Construction areas which are without direct access to the exterior by means of doors

will require access and security approval by the Authority. 1.16 TRUCK DOCKS, TAXI TUNNELS, RAMPS, AND PERIMETER SPACE ADJACENT TO

BUILDINGS A. Emergency access lanes shall be maintained to the satisfaction of the Authority and

applicable governmental agencies at all times. 1.17 CONTRACTOR'S OFFICES AND STORAGE AREAS A. Subject to the Authority's approval, the Contractor may use space in and around the

Work area as a field office. The Contractor shall provide his field office with all furniture and equipment required for use by personnel and for the storage of contract drawings, shop drawings, documents, data, samples and the like.

B. The Contractor shall provide his field office with and pay all costs of telephone and

electric service. C. If directed by the Authority, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of removal

of the field offices from within or around the existing Work. D. The Authority will be the sole judge of determining the acceptability of the appearance

of the Contractor’s office and storage areas. 1.18 COMBUSTIBLE AND FLAMMABLE MATERIALS A. The storage of all combustible and flammable materials shall be maintained outside

and detached from buildings. 1.19 TARPAULINS A. Only flameproof tarpaulins shall be used. 1.20 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION WALLS A. Non-combustible temporary walls and barricades shall be used to segregate

construction areas from the operating portions of the Authority’s property and they shall be used wherever sound, dust or odors may be transmitted to occupied areas. All joints shall be taped and made dustproof.

The Contractor’s design of temporary walls and barricades is subject to the Authority’s

Page 13: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-6

review and approval. Portions of wall exposed to view within the areas used by the public shall be taped and painted with colors selected by the Authority.

Temporary walls shall be removed and adjacent property in contact with the temporary

walls refinished when the Work within the construction area has been completed 1.21 PAINTS, SOLVENTS, OILS, GAS CYLINDERS, COMBUSTIBLES. A. No more than a one day supply of paints, solvents, oils, gas cylinders and combustibles

shall be permitted inside buildings. The handling of these materials shall be carefully controlled and supervised by the Contractor.

1.22 WELDING AND CUTTING A. All welding and cutting operations shall be done by competent personnel and shall be

controlled by the Contractor only with the Authority’s permission. The Contractor shall notify the Authority at least 48 hours prior to the start of each welding or cutting operation.

1.23 SMOKING A. Smoking is not permitted anywhere in or on Authority property except in those areas as

may be designated by the Authority. 1.24 CONSTRUCTION WASTE AND SCRAP MATERIAL A. All waste and scrap materials shall be removed by the Contractor from the Work on a

daily basis. 1.25 POWER ACTIVATED ANCHOR DEVICES A. Contractor shall not use power (shot) anchors for making attachments to concrete.

anchors shall be drilled. Any concrete damaged due to an inappropriate use of anchorage systems shall be removed and replaced at no expense to the Authority and to the extent determined by the Authority as sole judge of acceptability.

1.26 SHOP DRAWINGS A. One copy of each shop drawing of fire protection piping and alarm systems and all

related items shall be submitted to the Authority at the same time drawings are submitted to the Architect. This additional submittal must be reviewed by and be acceptable to the Authority's insurance company.

1.27 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS A. All life safety systems shall be restored to operation during the Contractor's non-

working hours unless otherwise permitted by the Authority. Contractor shall provide a fire watch during construction or during shut down periods of time. All improvements, shutdowns and fire watch activities shall be coordinated with and approved by the Authority's Safety and Security Departments. Existing systems shall be maintained at

Page 14: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-7

all times except for those periods where the Contractor is permitted to make changeovers from existing to new permanent systems.

B. Only the Authority will shut down and turn on life safety systems each time the

Contractor requires a changeover. 1.28 EXISTING DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Contractor shall not use existing drainage piping, floor or area drains for the disposal of

construction generated debris or hazardous materials. Existing and new drains shall be protected throughout the construction period.

1.29 DELIVERY ACCESS A. Contractor's deliveries shall not interfere with the loading and unloading of Show

Contractors’ vehicles. During show move-in and move-out, all deliveries shall be scheduled through the Authority's Truck Marshalling facility.

1.30 SHOW/CONTRACTORS COORDINATION A. On a weekly basis, the Contractor shall meet with the Authority and Show Management

to review and coordinate construction with show activities to the satisfaction of Show Managers and the Authority.

1.31 CONDITION OF SPACE A. The Contractor shall carefully review the Work Day Schedule. Work shall be scheduled

such that areas under construction shall be returned to the Authority in a useable fashion for show use at those times indicated on the Work Day Schedule which may be amended from time to time by the Authority. Contractor shall not work in those areas reserved for show use as outlined in the Work Day Schedule. In general this shall mean, but shall not be limited to, the following:

1. If work is begun on existing ceilings or floors in areas being used, those

areas shall be turned over for use by the Authority in a completed condition. 2. If work is begun on existing walls in areas being used, in those areas that are

not complete at the time that the area must be used by the Authority, the Contractor shall provide drapes or temporary partitions to cover the unfinished portion of the Work.

3. The condition in which areas are turned over from time to time for use by the Authority shall be carefully coordinated with the Authority who will solely determine what constitutes an acceptable condition.

1.32 TEMPORARY SIGNAGE: The Contractor shall provide only such temporary signage as is necessary for the conduct of the Work and such signage shall be subject to the approval of the Authority as to verbiage, size, color, graphics and location.

Page 15: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-8

1.33 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into standard Divisions and Sections.

1. Divisions are used for broad categories of trade and work disciplines.

2. Sections are subdivisions of the broad categories.

3. Only the categories that are applicable for this project are used, therefore all available category numbers are not necessarily present although the categories are in sequential order and those included are listed in the Table of Contents.

4. Division 1 applies to the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use standard conventions as to style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases.

1. Language used in the Specifications may be abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as may be appropriate in the context of the subject. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

3. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

END OF SECTION 01010

Page 16: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

COORDINATION 01040-1

SECTION 01040 COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for coordinating construction operations including,

but not limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 4. Cleaning and protection. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate all construction operations to assure efficient and orderly installation of the

Work. 1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best

results. 2. Coordinate installation of all Work to assure maximum accessibility for

maintenance, service, and repairs. B. Prepare memoranda, notices, reports, and attendance at meetings outlining procedures

required for coordination and distribute to those involved on the construction team, the Authority and separate contractors.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordination and scheduling of construction activities to

avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work, include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project closeout activities. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is

required for installation of Work where limited space necessitates maximum utilization of space. Show the relationship of components shown on Shop Drawings and indicate required installation sequences.

B. Staff Names: Within 7 days of the award of the contract, the Contractor shall submit a

Page 17: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

COORDINATION 01040-2

list of its principal staff assignments for Authority review and approval, including the project director, project manager, field superintendent and other key personnel identifying individuals and their duties and responsibilities. Include their addresses, telephone numbers and email addresses.

PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS A. Inspect the substrate and conditions for Work and do not proceed until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected. B. Coordinate the performance of required inspections and tests to avoid the necessity of

uncovering completed construction. 2.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and protect Work in progress and in place and apply protective covering where

required to avoid damage or deterioration. B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary

and adjust and lubricate components to avoid damage. C. Limiting Exposures: Assure that no part of the Work is subject to harmful, dangerous,

damaging, or deleterious exposure during the construction period, including but not limited to the following:

1. Excessive static or dynamic loading. 2. Excessive internal or external pressures. 3. Excessively high or low temperatures. 4. Thermal shock. 5. Excessively high or low humidity. 6. Air contamination or pollution. 7. Water or ice. 8. Solvents. 9. Chemicals. 10. Light. 11. Radiation. 12. Puncture. 13. Abrasion. 14. Heavy traffic. 15. Soiling, staining, and corrosion. 16. Bacteria. 17. Rodent and insect infestation. 18. Combustion. 19. Electrical current. 20. High-speed operation. 21. Improper lubrication. 22. Unusual wear or other misuse.

Page 18: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

COORDINATION 01040-3

23. Contact between different materials leading to corrosion. 24. Destructive testing. 25. Misalignment. 26. Excessive weathering. 27. Unprotected storage. 28. Improper shipping or handling. 29. Theft. 30. Vandalism.

END OF SECTION 01040

Page 19: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-1

SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING

1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general requirements for cutting and patching. Refer to other

Sections for requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching for specific parts of the Work.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit a plan describing procedures, well in advance of the

time cutting and patching will be performed, to the Architect and Authority for approval of the procedures before proceeding. Include the following information as applicable:

1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching contemplated showing how it will be

performed and indicating why it is necessary. 2. Describe the changes to structural elements, operating components, building's

appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work. 4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect, or that will

be relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of-service, indicating how long service will be disrupted.

6. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure.

7. Notwithstanding any approval by the Architect or the Authority, the Contractor shall remain responsible for the removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a

manner that would change their load-carrying capacity or deflections. B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related

components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended and do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life and life safety.

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in

occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's or the Authority’s opinion, affect aesthetics. Do not cut and patch that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace work that has been cut and patched, that is unsatisfactory in the opinion of the Architect or the Authority.

Page 20: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-2

1.4 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged

in such a manner as not to void any existing warranties. 1.5 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Use materials identical to existing materials that match existing adjacent surfaces. to

the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.

1.6 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and

patching is to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding.

1. Before proceeding, meet at the Site of the Work with parties involved in cutting

and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

1.7 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent

damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Work that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to

adjoining areas. D. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving existing facilities but scheduled

to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 1.8 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with

cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or

performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements

retained or adjoining construction. Review proposed procedures so as to comply with the original Installers’ recommendations.

1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or

Page 21: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-3

grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Cut through concrete and masonry using cutting machines such as carborundum or diamond-core saws and drills.

4. Comply with requirements of all applicable Sections where cutting and patching is required including, but not limited to, excavating and backfilling.

5. Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned; by-pass utility services, such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal portion of pipe or conduit that are to remain so as to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter.

C. Patching: Patch with materials that are as invisible as possible and comply with

specified tolerances. 1. Inspect and test patched areas to assure integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into

retained adjoining construction in a manner that will not show evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Where removing walls or partitions extends into adjacent existing spaces, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in such places. Provide even surfaces of uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

4. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat.

5. Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

1.9 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed, completely

removing paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

END OF SECTION 01045

Page 22: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

REFERENCE STANDARDS 01095-1

SECTION 01095 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic definitions are included in the Contract. In the event of any

discrepancies with these definitions, those in the Contract shall govern. B. Indicated: The term “indicated” refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules

in the Drawings and Specifications. Terms such as Shown, Noted, Scheduled, and Specified do not limit locations, extent or scope of the Work.

C. Directed: Terms such as “directed, requested, authorized, selected, approved,

required, and permitted” mean actions by the Authority or the Architect. D. Approve: The term “approved” is used in conjunction with the Authority’s or

Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and other requests stated in the Contract Documents.

E. Regulations: The term “regulations” includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful

orders issued by authorities and agencies having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions and agreements in the construction industry relating to performance of the Work.

F. Furnish: The term “furnish” means supply and deliver to the Project site ready for

unloading, unpacking, assembly and installation. G. Install: The term “install” means operations at the Project site such as unloading,

unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations necessary to complete the Work.

H. Provide: The term “provide” means to “furnish and install” complete, ready for use

and in compliance with Contract Requirements. I. Installer: An “installer” may be the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor,

either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.

1. The term “experienced”, when used with the term installer means having

previously and successfully completed a minimum of three projects of similar size and scope and also means having familiarity with the special requirements of governmental agencies with jurisdiction for such projects. Upon request, the Contractor shall submit detailed credentials and references to show evidence of the qualifications of such subcontractors and installers prior to their employment on the Project.

Page 23: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

REFERENCE STANDARDS 01095-2

2. Trades: Trade terms such as “carpentry” are not intended to limit construction

to individuals with a corresponding generic name, such as “carpenter” nor does it imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. Means and methods of performing the Work is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

3. Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications may require that specific

construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those activities; however, the use of such specialists does not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for fulfilling Contract Requirements.

This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with compliance with building codes and similar regulations governing the Work or to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional agreements and similar conventions.

J. “Project Site” is the space available for the Contractor to perform the Work but does

not mean the space is for the Contractor’s use exclusively since others may be performing work as separate contractors on the Project.

1.2 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections

based on industry standard numbering systems. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions regarding the style

of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Contract Documents may be

abbreviated and shall be interpreted as commonly used in the industry. Words that are implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable.

2. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the

Contractor. At some locations in the Specifications, subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled by the Contractor. The words "shall be" are implied wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more

stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents and are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

Page 24: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

REFERENCE STANDARDS 01095-3

B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract. C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified

and where the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, the most stringent requirement shall apply.

The Authority shall be the sole judge of which requirement is the most stringent. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or

specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with or may exceed the minimum quantity or quality specified. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, in the context of the requirements.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required

to be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity whether or not bound with the Contract Documents.

E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of standards may be

abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, and authority having jurisdiction or other applicable entity in the context of the provision. The "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Co. may be used as a reference.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: Submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications,

inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence, and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work.

END OF SECTION 01095

Page 25: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152-1

SECTION 01152 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

1.1 GENERAL A. Submit Applications for Payment to the Authority in accordance with the provisions

established by the Contract. 1.2 PENCIL DRAW A. Prior to the submission of the formal Application, meet with the Authority in a so-called

“pencil draw” to informally discuss and tentatively mutually agree with the Authority on the content and details of the current Application. The format of the pencil draw will be established by the parties attending.

1.3 FORMAT A. Submit the Application using the format of AIA Document G702 and G703. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. Submit Applications for Payment in the number of copies requested and include Waivers

of Lien, Affidavits and other substantiating documents as requested or required. 1.5 PREPARATION OF APPLICATIONS A. Application Form Content: 1. Include Change Orders to date. 2. Show summary Schedule of Values with data supported by detailed supporting

Schedules of Values for each line item. See Section 01370 for Schedules of Value.

3. Execute certification by an authorized person. 1.6 SUBSTANTIATING DATA A. Provide such substantiating data and documentation as may be requested by the

Authority, 1.7 WAIVERS OF LIEN A. Submit waivers of lien and sworn statements from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors

and suppliers in the form required by the Contract or as may be requested by the Authority.

Page 26: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152-2

1.8 PRECEDENT DATA FOR PAYMENT A. Prior to the first Application for Payment submit the following: 1. List of all subcontractors, lower tier sub-subcontractors and suppliers 2.. List of Contractor's consultants and testing agencies. 3. Summary Schedule of Values and supporting detailed Schedules of Values. 4. Schedule of principal products. 5. Submittal Schedule. 6. Construction Schedule. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of

the Work. 9. Initial progress report. 10. Report of pre-construction meeting. 2. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies (prior to any work on site). 3. Performance and payment bonds. 4. Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required. 1.9 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede this Application include: 1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. 2. Warranties (guarantees) agreements. 3. Test reports. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Final cleaning. 6. Consent of surety. 7. Detailed and monetized list of incomplete Work (including punchlists), recognized

as exceptions to the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.10 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede this application include: 1. Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of all incomplete Work (including punchlists). 3. Provisions that assure that unsettled claims will be settled. 4. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Authority. 5. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid. 6. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 7. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements.

END OF SECTION 01152

Page 27: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

PROGRESS MEETINGS 01202-1

SECTION 01202 PROGRESS MEETINGS

1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings

including: 1. Pre-Construction Meeting. 2. Pre-Installation Meeting. 3. Coordination Meetings. 4. Progress Meetings. 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. The Authority will schedule a pre-construction and organizational meeting at the Project

site prior to commencement of construction activities to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

B. Attendees: The Authority, Architect and Contractor and its superintendent, major

subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and other concerned parties shall each be represented at the meeting by persons familiar with and authorized to resolve matters relating to the Work.

C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress including such topics

as: 1. Project Schedule. 2. Critical Work sequencing. 3. Designation of responsible personnel. 4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 6. Review/verification of Contract Documents. 7. Summary of Critical Requirements. 8. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 9. Preparation of record documents. 10. Use of the premises. 11. Office, Work and off-site staging, parking and storage areas. 12. Materials and equipment deliveries and priorities. 13. Safety procedures. 14. First aid. 15. Security. 16. Housekeeping. 17. Working hours. 18. Clean-up. 19. Temporary facilities.

Page 28: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

PROGRESS MEETINGS 01202-2

D. Unless otherwise requested by the Authority, prepare and issue minutes of the meeting which shall identify and list the title of the project and the title of the meeting; the date, time and place of the meeting; attendees; the purpose of the meeting; discussions, decisions and actions to be taken; status of required submittals; critical dates and priorities and responsibilities. Distribute the report of the meeting to everyone in attendance plus others involved within three (3) working days after the meeting date.

1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Conduct pre-installation meetings at the site. The Installers, manufacturer’s

representatives, fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and those involved with other installations that precede or follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Authority in advance of all meeting dates.

1. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration at each pre-installation meeting, including requirements for:

a. Contract Documents coordination. b. Options. c. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases e. Deliveries, staging. f. Shop Drawings, Product Data and quality control Samples. g. Possible conflicts. h. Compatibility problems. i. Warranty and Guarantee requirements. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. l. Manufacturer's recommendations. m. Compatibility of materials. n. Acceptability of substrates. o. Temporary facilities. p. Space and access limitations. q. Governing regulations. r. Safety. s. Inspection and testing requirements. t. Required performance results. u. Record Documents. v. Protection and cleaning. w. Cooperation with Authority and other contractors. x. Schedule. 2. Prepare minutes of each meeting and distribute copies to all concerned, including

the Authority and Architect, within three (3) working days after the meeting date. 3. Do not proceed with the Work if the meeting does not resolve all issues. Initiate,

expedite and resolve impediments to the Work and reconvene the meeting at the earliest practicable date.

Page 29: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

PROGRESS MEETINGS 01202-3

1.4 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Conduct coordination meetings at regularly scheduled times. Project coordination

meetings are in addition to regular progress meetings and pre-installation meetings. B. Have representation at each meeting of all those involved in coordination and planning

for the related activities. C. Prepare and issue minutes of the meeting within three (3) working days after the meeting

date and show the title of the project, title of the meeting, date, time, place, attendees, purpose, discussions, decisions, actions to be taken, status of submittals, critical dates, priorities and responsibilities. Distribute the minutes to all involved or affected.

1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The Authority will schedule regular periodic meetings as it may be deem necessary to

discuss the progress of the Work. B. Attendees should be: 1. Authority's representatives. 2. Consultants. 3. Contractor's Project Manager. 4. Project superintendent. 5. Subcontractors and suppliers as necessary. All representatives should have authority to act regarding the Work. C. The Contractor shall maintain daily progress records containing significant matters such

as problems, material deliveries, scheduling, manpower and weather conditions. D. Agenda: 1. Reviews of current progress schedule. 2. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 3. Planned work progress until next meeting. 4. Problems affecting construction progress. 5. Corrective measures to be taken. 6. Sequences. 7. Deliveries. 8. Off-site fabrication. 9. Site access. 10. Site utilization. 11. Temporary facilities and services. 12. Hours of Work. 13. Safety. 14. Housekeeping. 15. Quality and Work standards. 16. Field observations, problems, conflicts, coordination. 17. Submittals.

Page 30: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

PROGRESS MEETINGS 01202-4

18. Requests for Information, Architect's Supplemental Instructions. 19. Change Orders. 20. Documentation for payment requests. 21. Other Business. 22. Completion Schedule. 23. Coordination with others. E. The Contractor shall submit a written report indicating the work completed to date and

planned work for the next work period at each meeting. As discussed and amended, these reports shall be compiled by the Contractor and submitted to the Authority within three (3) working days after the meeting date.

F. The Architect or Authority may issue a written commentary clarifying, correcting or

supplementing the Contractor's report of the meeting.

END OF SECTION 01202

Page 31: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 01310-1

SECTION 01310 SCHEDULES AND REPORTS

1.1 GENERAL A. In addition to other submission requirements in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit

the schedules and reports defined in this Section. B. The CPM schedule is required to assist the Authority and the Contractor. C. The Project Schedule is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. Float, the time duration between the early finish and late finish dates of the schedule, is

not for the exclusive use or benefit of the Contractor and may be used by the Authority. 1.2 SCHEDULES AND SCHEDULE REPORTS

The Contractor shall provide the following: A. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE GRAPHIC

Provide a Construction Schedule Graphic in the form of a time scaled logic diagram showing pre-construction and construction activities and their relationships. Bar charts without logic clearly indicated are not acceptable. Include: pre-construction activities; permit acquisition; submittal/review/approval process for samples and mockups; manufacture/delivery cycles of manufactured items; actual construction, punch lists and clean up. Follow the Work Breakdown structure specified hereinafter. Illustrate compliance with the Specifications, special requirements and coordination with the Work Day Schedules provided by the Authority. B. PROJECT SCHEDULE Within 21 days after the date of the Contract, prepare a fully detailed computer generated schedule using Critical Path Method precedence diagramming in a system equal to and compatible with latest edition of Primavera Project Planner, and submit for approval by the Authority. This schedule shall be a detailed expansion of any requirement for a Proposed Construction Schedule in the Request for Proposal. The CPM network shall include testing and inspection activities. It shall be fully coordinated with the requirements of the Authority for the maintaining of its operations and, if applicable, shall reflect the performance of work by other contractors. Show submittal/review activities and indicate applicable Specification Sections.

Page 32: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 01310-2

Show activities that are the responsibility of the Authority and others.

1. Upon approval by the Authority, the Project Schedule shall become the Baseline for the Project. The Contractor shall provide the Authority with complete schedule information stored in, or generated by, the Contractor’s approved computer based project management system. Information which is not text or graphic information delivered in hard copy shall be delivered to the Authority stored on electronic media in a form suitable for use by the Authority’s computer systems and project management software.

Hard copy reports and graphics shall be submitted in their original printer or plotter output form in six copies. All password protection, user lists, access lists or other electronic protections shall be removed or adjusted so that the Authority can have complete access to all the relevant information contained therein.

The Contractor shall:

1. Apply retained logic rather than progress override, 2. Show start-to-start lag from early start, 3. Show early start of finish-to-finish successors as contiguous duration, 4. Show total float. 5. Show progress graphics using percent complete. 6. Employ activity coding as outlined in this Section such that the Authority can undertake

sorts or filters based on the Authority’s project management software to isolate activities and produce reports of their status independent of the balance of the schedule.

7. Assure that the Project Schedule is cost loaded, updated and maintained. 8. Submit electronic media based copies, reports and graphics as specified below.

C. CHANGES 1. If a Change in the Work is authorized prior to a mutual agreement on possible changes to

the Lump Sum Contract Price or the Project Schedule, then to avoid delay, the Contractor shall revise the network logic and/or duration time estimates of all activities affected by the modification on the next succeeding update report. Submit the revisions for concurrence by the Authority prior to inclusion in the network.

2. Revise the Submittal Checklist to reflect such changes. 1.4 PERIODIC SCHEDULE PROGRESS REPORTS The Contractor shall provide the following reports: A. WEEKLY REPORT 1. TWO-WEEK LOOK AHEAD: At least once a week the Contractor shall meet with all

trades concerned to establish and submit a detailed Two-Week Look Ahead schedule indicating daily activities of all of the trades and subcontractors in each area of the Project.

Page 33: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 01310-3

B. MONTHLY SCHEDULE AND PROGRESS REPORT 1. The Contractor shall incorporate into the CPM Project Schedule all current schedule

status information and perform a complete network recalculation and analysis monthly.

The following report and copy of the schedule information stored on electronic media

shall be submitted to the Authority by the twenty-fifth of each month, reflecting progress projected to the end of that month and shall contain the following minimum information:

a. Narrative Description of Project Progress During the Current Month. b. Summary Schedule Graphic in Bar Chart Format. c. Tabular reports of the updated Project Schedule including an Activity Listing

organized by Early (earliest to latest) and an Activity Listing by Float (lowest to highest).

d. An Updated Project Cash Flow Projection. e. A written report showing action taken to correct any schedule slippage. f. The schedule information shall be stored on electronic media as specified

herein. C. SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST/PROGRESS REPORT 1. The Contractor shall provide a list or log of all submittals required by the

Specifications in either of the two forms listed below: a) A checklist produced independently of the Project Schedule. b) A tabular or graphic schedule report generated directly from the Contractor’s

scheduling or project management program using a sort or filter of the database to isolate the submittal activities in the schedule and show their status and progress.

2. The Project Schedule and Submittal Checklist shall be mutually consistent in both

content and status of submittal activities. The Submittal Checklist shall be submitted initially with the Project Schedule and then updated and resubmitted weekly thereafter. The basic information required and a suggested format are shown below but alternative formats may be submitted for approval by the Authority.

1.5 OTHER REPORTS A. DAILY REPORTS: The Contractor shall submit to the Authority a Daily Construction

Report recording and reporting the following information. 1. List of subcontractors at the site. 2. List of separate contractors at the site. 3. A count of personnel at the site. 4. Accidents of any nature. 5. Meetings and significant decisions. 6. Unusual events. 7. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 8. Emergency procedures undertaken.

Page 34: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 01310-4

9. Inspections, orders and requests of governing authorities. 10. Change Orders received, implemented, requested or expected to be requested. 11. Services connected or disconnected. 12. Partial completions or occupancies 13. Substantial Completion. 14. A narrative description of daily construction activities. 15. Any other required reports required by the Contract. 16. Reports of material and equipment delivery and location of storage or placement. B. FIELD CORRECTION REPORTS 1. When the need to take corrective action that requires a departure from the Contract

Documents arises, prepare a detailed report including a statement describing the problem and recommended changes. Indicate reasons the Contract Documents cannot be followed and submit a copy to the Architect and Authority immediately.

1.6 WORK BREAKDOWN

Activities shall be organized and reported per the following:

General

1. Submittals 2. Permit 3. Procurement 4. Demolition 5. General 6. Architectural 7. M.E.P. 8. Punch list

Activity coding shall include at least the following:

1. Area per work breakdown above. 2. Responsibility by Contractor, Subcontractor, Manufacturer, Authority, Architect and

any other entity with responsibility for or control over any activity. 3. Submittals, Procurement, Permits, Preconstruction, Construction, Punch list. 4. Any other categories which may be appropriate to organize the work. 5. Project specifications section where applicable.

END OF SECTION 01310

Page 35: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 01340-1

SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES

1.1 GENERAL A. Submit a Checklist, indicating the scheduled dates for submission and review of Shop

Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.

B. Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared to illustrate some portion of the Work.

C. Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instruction,

brochures, diagrams and other data to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

D. Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship to

establish standards by which the Work will be judged. E. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract

Documents and they do not revise, alter, negate or in any way change any of the Contract Requirements.

F. The Contractor shall review and approve all submittals before submitting them for the

review of the Architect or the Authority, with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Authority or of separate contractors.

The review and approval of submittals by the Contractor represents that he has

determined and verified that materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto have been checked and coordinated with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.

G. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of

Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the relevant submittals have been reviewed by the Architect.

H. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for strict compliance with the

Contract Requirements by the approval action of submittals by the Architect or the Authority.

I. No deviation from Contract Requirements is permitted unless specifically requested in

writing and approved in writing by the Authority. J. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in submittals

for any reason whatsoever including, but not limited to, the approval action by the Architect or the Authority.

K. The Contractor shall call specific attention, in writing, on resubmitted submittals to

revisions other than those requested by the Architect or the Authority on previous submittals.

Page 36: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 01340-2

L. There may be Informational submittals identified in the Contract Documents upon which

no approval action is expected. M. When professional certification of calculations or performance criteria for materials,

systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect or the Authority shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such documentation.

N. The Architect or the Authority will review and take appropriate approval action on the

Contractor's submittals, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformity with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The approval action will be taken with reasonable promptness so as not to cause delay in the Work.

Reviews of submittals are not for the purpose of determining the accuracy and

completeness of details such as dimensions, quantities, substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment and systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor, and such reviews do not relieve the Contractor of any of its obligations under the Contract.

Reviews do not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means,

methods, techniques, sequences, procedures or assembly of which the items are a component.

O. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using its best skills and attention and

shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract specifically instructs otherwise.

The Contractor shall be responsible for acts and omissions of its and the Subcontractors’

employees, agents and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor.

The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work performed under

this Contract to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.

P. The Contractor warrants to the Authority that materials and equipment furnished under

the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the Contract Requirements.

Page 37: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 01340-3

Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If requested by the Architect or the Authority, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of such materials and equipment.

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared drawings or information, drawn to accurate scale. Do not

reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard printed information as the basis of Shop Drawings unless authorized to do so.

1. Include the following information on Shop Drawings: a. Configurations in detail. b. Dimensions, work points, gauges and capacities. c. Identification of products and materials. d. Compliance with specified standards. e. Notation of coordination requirements. f. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. g. Contractor's Structural Engineer's Certified Drawings and Calculations. 2. Submit Coordination Drawings where required for integration of different

construction elements. Show construction sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in utilization of the space available.

3. Highlight, encircle or otherwise indicate Authority approved deviations from the Contract Documents on the Shop Drawings. Do not include any deviations not properly authorized by the Authority.

4. Do not permit Shop Drawing copies to be used in construction without an appropriate final stamp or other marking indicating the action taken by the Architect.

B. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner, identified by reference to

sheet, detail, schedule, location or other indications shown on Drawings. 1.3 PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wirings diagrams and controls.

Page 38: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 01340-4

B. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: 1. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable to the

Work. 2. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to

the Work. C. Include the following information in Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. 2. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. 3. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. 4. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 5. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. 6. Notation of coordination requirements. D. Do not submit Product Data unless compliance with requirements of the Contract is

confirmed. 1.4 SAMPLES A. Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of product, with integrally related parts and attachment

devices. 2. Full range of color, texture and patterns. B. Submit Samples that are physically identical with the material or product proposed for

use, full-size, fully fabricated and finished in the manner specified. 1. Mount, display, or package Samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of

qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match the Architect's Sample where so indicated. Include the following information:

a. Generic description of the Sample. b. Size limitations. c. Sample source. d. Product name or name of manufacturer. e. Compliance with recognized standards. f. Compliance with governing regulations. g. Availability. h. Delivery time. 2. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of

these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed.

Page 39: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 01340-5

a. Where variations in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented by a Sample, submit sets of multiple units of the Sample (not less than 3 units), which show approximate limits of the variations.

1.5 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall make submittals promptly in accordance with the approved schedule and

in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in work of others. B. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of the Work.

Transmit each submittal to the Authority and the Architect sufficiently in advance of scheduled performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.

1. Coordinate each submittal with other submittals and related activities that require

sequential activity including: a. Purchasing. b. Fabrication. c. Delivery. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for the same element of the

Work and different elements of related parts of the Work so that processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. The Architect or the Authority has the right to withhold action on a submittal

requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are submitted.

3. Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the

time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. a. Allow at least 10 working days for the initial review of each submittal plus

additional time where processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals.

b. Where necessary to provide an intermediate submittal between the initial and final submittals, process the intermediate submittal in the same manner as the initial submittal.

c. Allow at least10 working days for processing of each resubmittal. d. Advise the Architect or the Authority when processing time is critical to

progress, and the Work would be expedited if processing time could be shortened.

e. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.

f. Distribute all submittals under a transmittal which shall include the date, project title, addressor, addressee, purpose, number of reproducibles sent and number of reproductions sent. For each item sent, the Specification Section Number and the Submittal Title as it appears in the Submittal Checklist should be listed as well as any other critical information relevant to the submittal should be noted.

Page 40: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 01340-6

C. The Contractor shall review and approve Submittals to the Architect or the

Authority in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work or the activities of the Authority or of the Authority’s separate contractors. The Contractor shall, on the first page of each bound set, on each single document page or on the label of each sample, affix its stamp which shall state and certify that the Contractor has reviewed, coordinated and approved the work as proposed in such submittal, has checked existing conditions, dimensions, actual field measurements, layouts, connections, fit, match and hidden conditions and that the work as shown on such submittal complies with Contract Requirements. Submittals received without Contractors review stamp will be returned for proper resubmittal.

D. If the Contractor makes all submittals directly to the Architect in the required

number of sets, a copy of the cover transmittal shall be sent concurrently to the Authority.

E. Number of submittals required: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit one (l) reproducible transparency along with

sufficient opaque reproductions to provide the number of prints required by the Contractor, plus two (2) which will be retained by the Architect, plus three (3) which will be retained by the Authority.

2. Product Data: Submit number of copies required by the Contractor, plus two (2) which will be retained by Architect and three (3) which will be retained by the Authority.

3. Samples: Submit number of samples required by the Contractor, plus two (2) which will be retained by Architect and three (3) which will be retained by the Authority.

F. Submittals shall contain the following: 1. Date of submission and dates of any previous submissions. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contract identification. 4. Names of Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer. 5. Identification of the product, with Specification Section number. 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the Work or materials. 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. 9. Identification of approved deviations from Contract Requirements. 10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 11. An 8" x 3" blank space for Contractor and Architect or Authority approval

stamps. 12. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittals,

verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of information within submittal with requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.

1.6 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENT

Page 41: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 01340-7

A. Contractor shall make any corrections or changes in Submittals required by the Architect or the Authority and resubmit until approved.

B. Shop Drawings , Product Data, and Samples: 1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. 2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by

the Architect or the Authority. C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 1.7 ARCHITECT'S OR AUTHORITY’S ACTION A. Compliance with contract documents is the Contractor's responsibility. B. Approval Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform,

self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken:

1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked "Reviewed," that

part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed, provided it complies with Contract Requirements. Final acceptance will depend upon that compliance.

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Furnish As Corrected," that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with both the Architect's notations or corrections on the submittal and Contract Requirements; final acceptance will depend on that compliance.

3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity, revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the Architect's notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. Do not permit submittals marked "Rejected" or "Revise and Resubmit as Noted" to be used on the Project.

4. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, for special processing or other Contractor activity, the submittal will be returned marked "Action Not Required".

1.8 DISTRIBUTION A. Contractor shall distribute reproductions of Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data

which carry Architect's stamp of approval to: 1. Contractor's Job site file. 2. Contractor's Record Documents file. 3. Subcontractors. 4. Suppliers or Fabricators. 5. The Authority.

Page 42: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 01340-8

B. The Contractor and Architect shall distribute to the Authority, in-progress samples and actual samples which shall bear the Contractor’s stamp of approval and the Architect’s stamp of approval in exactly the same process as for Shop Drawing and Product Data and that, prior to Closeout, Contractor shall transmit to the Authority one indexed filed and boxed set of actual samples, which shall each bear the Contractor’s stamp of approval and the Architect’s stamp of approval. Such samples are in addition to any requirements specified for Attic Stock or Extra Material.

END OF SECTION 01340

Page 43: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01370-1

SECTION 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

1.1 GENERAL A. This Section augments the Payment Application provisions of the Contract and in case of

a conflict, the requirements of the Contract shall govern. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordinate the Schedule of Values with the Construction Schedule. 1. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Authority for approval before submitting the

first Payment Application. 2. Sub-Schedules: Provide sub-schedules as necessary showing details and

breakdowns of line items in the primary Schedule. B. Format and Content: Use format equivalent to AIA Documents G-702 and G-703 and

include the following project identification on the Schedule of Values:

1. Name and address of the Authority. 2. Title of Project and location. 3. Name of Architect/Engineer. 4. Name and Address of Contractor. 5. Contract identification. 6. Date of submission. 7. Generic name of item. 8. Related Specification Section. 9. Name of subcontractor. 10. Name of manufacturer, fabricator or supplier. 11. Change Orders. C. Provide the breakdowns of the line items in sufficient detail satisfactory to the Authority.

1. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar. 2. Each item shall be for the actual proper cost of the work with no unbalancing. 3. Establish separate line items for general conditions, overhead and profit, insurance

and bond costs. Such items should be billed at the same percentage as gross contract completion unless approved otherwise by the Authority.

4. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials when permitted by the Authority, break down values into:

a. Price of the materials, delivered and unloaded. b. Total installed value.

D Schedule Updating: Update and revise the Schedule of Values to reflect Change Orders

or when requested by the Authority to reflect actual costs. E. The Schedule of Values shall contain only items of work of tangible value to the Authority

Page 44: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01370-2

and intangible or indirect items such as Mobilization, Engineering, Shop Drawings will not be periodically paid for unless at the same percentage as gross contract completion unless approved otherwise by the Authority..

END OF SECTION 01370

Page 45: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400-1

SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES

1.1 SUMMARY A. Quality control services include inspections, tests and reports performed by

independent agencies, governmental authorities, and the Contractor. B. Inspection and testing services shall verify compliance with contract requirements.

C. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation

procedures. 1. Additional quality control requirements are specified in other Sections and

include inspections and tests for standard products. 2. Inspections, test and related actions specified do not limit the Contractor's

own quality control procedures that may be required to ensure compliance with Contract Requirements.

1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and

similar quality control services, specified in individual Specification Sections and required by governing authorities, except where they are specifically indicated to be the Authority’s responsibility, or are provided by other identified entities. The costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price.

1. The Contractor shall employ and pay an independent agency, acceptable to

the Authority, to perform specified quality control services. 2. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of

required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Requirements, regardless of whether or not the original test was the Contractor’s responsibility.

a. Cost of retesting Work revised or replaced by the Contractor is the

Contractor’s responsibility. 3. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies

performing required inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required, include but are not limited to:

a. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and

facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. b. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that

require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples. c. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery

Page 46: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400-2

of samples to testing laboratories. d. Providing testing agencies with preliminary design mixes that require

later testing by the agencies. e. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Site. B. Duties of Independent Agencies: Independent agencies engaged to perform

inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Specification Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and Authority in performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests.

1. The agency shall notify the Architect and Authority promptly of irregularities

or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or increase Contract

Requirements, and approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. The agency shall not perform any of the Work itself. 4. The agency shall comply with specified standards and other recognized

industry standards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each

inspection, test or similar service, to the Architect and Authority, in duplicate. 1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to governing

authorities when required to do so. 2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall

include, but not limited to: a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. c. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and related Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. i. Test results and interpretations thereof. j. Ambient climatic conditions at the time of sample-taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinions as to whether inspected or tested

Work complies with Contract Requirements. l. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. m. Recommendations on re-testing if required.

Page 47: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400-3

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Testing Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service

agencies, including independent testing laboratories, who are prequalified as complying with "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, who satisfy the requirements of ASTM E329, and who specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.

1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project

must be authorized to operate in the State of Illinois and the City of Chicago. 2.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar

services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect

repaired construction. C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility. 2.2 TESTING A. All items requiring inspection and/or testing shall not be concealed or covered until

the test or inspection has been completed and the work accepted. Any items which are covered prior to such inspections or tests shall be uncovered for the test or inspection as directed by the Architect or the Authority at no additional cost to the Authority.

END OF SECTION 01400

Page 48: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-1

SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

1.1 GENERAL A. The Work includes the minimum requirements for temporary work. B. This Section does not limit the type or amount of temporary work required for the

successful completion of the Project and for compliance with the Contract Requirements. The Contractor shall provide all temporary work and services required for the Work. The Contractor shall install, operate, protect, service, maintain, and remove all temporary work connecting to existing building services.

C. Temporary connections shall not be made to new or existing permanent service lines

without approval of the Authority. When the temporary service lines are no longer required, they shall be removed by the Contractor.

D. Any part or parts of the permanent service lines, grounds and buildings, disturbed or

damaged by the installation or removal of temporary service lines shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor.

1.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC POWER A. Subject to the approval of the Authority, existing electrical systems may be used to

provide temporary power for construction. The Contractor shall ascertain the electrical characteristics and insure their compatibility with construction tools and equipment.

B. The Contractor shall reimburse the Authority for providing temporary service connections

at junction boxes in existing electrical systems. The Contractor shall provide all supplementary wiring, outlets and lighting, required for the proper conduct of the Work. All temporary electric services shall be properly insulated and maintained in a safe manner, and shall be installed in accordance with the applicable requirements of all governing codes and ordinances.

C. The Authority will pay for the cost of electrical energy from existing electrical systems

used for the work provided it is used efficiently and properly in the sole opinion of the Authority.

1.3 TEMPORARY WATER SUPPLY A. Subject to the approval of the Authority existing water supply systems may be used to

provide temporary water for construction. B. The Contractor shall reimburse the Authority for providing all temporary service

connections to existing water supply systems. The Contractor shall provide all supplementary distribution equipment required to bring an adequate supply of water to valved outlets within the areas of construction and all supplementary hoses, valves and outlets required for the proper conduct of the Work.

Page 49: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-2

C. The Authority will pay the cost of water from existing water supply systems used for the work provided it is used efficiently and properly in the sole opinion of the Authority.

1.4 SANITARY FACILITIES A. The Contractor shall provide its own sanitary facilities for the use of all construction

personnel. The Contractor shall prohibit construction personnel from using the Authority’s sanitary facilities.

B. The Contractor shall provide all supplies and cleaning services as required. 1.5 FIELD OFFICE AND TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Subject to the approval of the Authority, the Contractor may use space on the Authority's

property as a field office. The Contractor shall provide a field office with all furniture and equipment required for its use and for the storage of Project drawings, documents, data, samples, etc. and shall keep the office clean and in good order. The Contractor shall include a large table and chairs suitable for conducting job progress meetings.

B. The Contractor shall provide the field office with and pay all costs for telephone and

electric service.

C. The Contractor shall remove field offices from within or around the existing building at its own cost when directed by the Authority.

D. The Authority will be the sole judge of determining the acceptability of the appearance of

the Contractor’s office and storage areas.

E. Exterior storage shall be enclosed with 6 ft minimum height chain link fencing equipped with opaque slats to provide a visual barrier.

1.6 HOISTS, DERRICKS, LADDERS AND SCAFFOLDING A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all hoists, derricks, ladders, scaffolding, lifting

apparatus and other such equipment and required for the execution of the work, equipped with all safety devices required by and in compliance with laws and regulations. Such equipment shall not interfere with the work nor damage property.

1.7 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND TEMPORARY COVERINGS A. Protect all areas and facilities adjacent to the areas of construction, all utility lines,

adjacent buildings, site improvements and landscaping from damage caused by construction operations. All damage shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of the Authority and the Architect.

B. Provide, maintain and remove all temporary coverings as required to protect materials,

equipment, and the completed work. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damages until final acceptance.

C. Protect all new or existing finished surfaces, walls, stairways, floors, paving, walkways,

Page 50: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-3

traffic lanes, decks, jambs, soffits and all openings used as passageways or through which materials are handled; against any damage resulting from construction operations

D. Provide temporary weather protection during intervals between demolition and removal of

existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structures or interior areas of new or existing facilities.

1.8 SECURITY A. The Contractor shall provide all security that may be required for the protection of the

Work, equipment, materials and tools.

END OF SECTION 01500

Page 51: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-1

SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

1.1 GENERAL A. All material and equipment incorporated into the Work shall meet or exceed the following

criteria: 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in

writing by Architect or the Authority. 3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best engineering and

shop practices. b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, to be

interchangeable. c. Two or more items of same kind shall be identical, by same manufacturer. d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be

adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. 4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is

designed or is specified. B. Match Existing: Wherever existing work is to be repaired, refurbished, removed and

replaced, etc., and/or wherever new work is to be added to existing work, all materials incorporated into such new work shall, unless specified or noted otherwise, match in quality, size, color, texture, finish, etc., similar materials in existing work. The Architect or the Authority shall be the sole judge as to whether or not each new material is an acceptable match to existing material.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product List Schedule: Prepare a schedule showing products specified in an acceptable

form and include generic names, manufacturers’ names and proprietary names for each item or product listed.

1. Coordinate the product list with the Project Schedule and the Submittal Checklist. 2. Prepare the product listing schedule with information on each item tabulated under

the following column headings: a. Related Specification Section number. b. Generic name used in Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date, or time span of delivery period.

Page 52: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-2

3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 4 copies of an initial product list schedule, 2 copies to the Authority and 2 copies to the Architect. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for deviations from Contract Requirements.

a. The initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations

that must be established early in the contract period. 4. Completed Schedule: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work,

submit 4 copies of the completed product list schedule distributed as indicated above. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for deviations from Contract Requirements. No deviations will be permitted unless approved in writing by the Authority.

5. Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to the completed product

list schedule. All products must comply with Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind,

from a single source. 1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not or cannot

produce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the Architect for a determination of the most important product qualities before proceeding. Qualities may include attributes relating to visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources that produce products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possible.

B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between

two or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

C. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint

manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exteriors of Authority property.

1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or,

where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data:

Page 53: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-3

a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. 1.4 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When the Contract requires that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's

printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in installation, including two copies to Architect and two copies to Authority prior to installation or start of work.

1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at job site during installation and until

completion in a 3-ring binder, tabbed for easy reference following the Specifications format.

B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with

manufacturers’ instructions and in conformity with drawings and specifications. 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's

instructions, consult with the Architect or the Authority for further instructions before proceeding with the work.

C. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions without omitting any

preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Requirements.

1.5 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange and coordinate deliveries of Products in accordance with the Progress Schedule

to avoid conflict with Work and job conditions. 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturers’ original containers or

packaging and with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Inspect shipments to assure compliance with Contract Requirements and approved

submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged. B. Handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 1.6 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store products in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions, seals and labels intact

and legible. 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather tight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges required by manufacturers’

instructions. B. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic

Page 54: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-4

inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration.

C. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage by

traffic or construction operations and remove them when no longer needed. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Contractor's Options: 1. For products specified only by a referenced standard, select only products that

meet that standard. 2. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and "or

approved equal"; and products specified as "equal to" or "not limited to" a specifically named product or manufacturer: the Contractor must submit a request for substitutions for any product or manufacturer not specifically named.

3. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers, select any one of the products or manufacturers named or specified with no substitutions.

B. Request for Substitutions: 1. Requests for substitutions will be considered only if in accordance with the

requirements listed herein. 2. Substitutions require Authority approval in writing. 3. The Contractor shall submit the following information with any request for

substitution: a. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution. b. Identify the product, fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each

request and show related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:

1) Product data, including drawings and descriptions. 2) Samples. 3) Detailed comparison of qualities of the proposed substitution with those

of the Work specified and include such elements as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect.

4) Include a list of modifications needed to other parts of the Work that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution.

5) Effect on the Construction Schedule and Contract Time. 6) Cost information, including a credit proposal, if any. 7) Certification that the substitution proposed is equal-to or better in every

respect to that required by the Contract and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated.

8) Include waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.

4. For substitutions, the Contractor shall represent all of the following:

Page 55: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-5

a. The proposed product is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. b. The same or superior warranties or bonds will be provided as for the product

specified. c. Any changes as may be required will be made to make the work complete in

all respects at no additional cost to the Authority. d. The Contractor understands that certain products may be specified due to

unique visual or performance requirements required and the decision of the Architect or the Authority will be final.

d. The Contractor understands that it will bear the costs of the Architect, Consultants or the Authority in evaluating or processing the proposed substitution.

e. Contractor certifies that it will bear all related costs for the substitution which later become apparent.

5. The Contractor's substitution request will be considered only when the following

conditions are satisfied. a. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. b. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract. c. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted. d. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in

the Contract Documents. e. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within

the Contract Time except if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or properly.

f. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority.

g. An advantage is offered to the Authority, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations.

h. The specified product or method of construction cannot be made compatible with other elements of the Work.

i. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other elements of the Work.

j. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract.

6. The Architect's action on Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples on items that

do not comply with the Contract, does not constitute an acceptance or approval of any substitution.

C. EVALUATION 1. Any costs incurred by the Authority to review requests for substitutions shall be

borne by the Contractor.

Page 56: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-6

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION A. Provide products that comply with the Contract, that are undamaged, new and not used 1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, other

devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect.

2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

B. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract,

governmental laws, regulations and the following: 1. Where three or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the

products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. a. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by

the term "or equal," or "or approved equal", comply with the provisions concerning "substitutions".

2. Where the Specifications list products or manufacturers that do not require the

Contractor to use these products only, the Contractor may propose any product that complies with Contract Requirements.

3. Where the Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract Requirements.

4. Where Specifications require compliance with performance criteria, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a given application. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance.

5. Where the Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with the codes, standards or regulations specified.

6. Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.

7. Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other Contract Requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected.

END OF SECTION 01600

Page 57: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1

SECTION 01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

Provide all labor, materials, equipment, supervision and incidentals necessary for closeout procedures, final cleaning, project record documents, warranties and waivers of lien. This work is incidental to the project.

1.02 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Submit written certification to the Architect / Engineer / Owner that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected and that work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect’s and Engineer’s punchlist walkthrough.

B. As applicable, provide final approved submittals and certificates of inspections

to the Owner indicating evidence of compliance with requirements of the governing authorities.

C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total Contract Sum (with all

approved change orders), previous payments, and retainage due.

D. Provide final as-built drawings to the Engineer/Owner. Maintain as-built drawings on the project site.

1.03 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to Architect’s / Engineer’s punchlist walkthrough.

B. Clean debris from drainage systems.

C. Clean site. Sweep and powerwash floor slabs in the work areas, and adjacent areas as required and directed by the Owner.

D. Clean interior and exterior glass surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary

labels, stains and foreign substances, and polish transparent and glossy surfaces.

E. Clean mechanical / electrical equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. Reattach dislodged hangers for mechanical / electrical systems, as required.

F. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from

the site.

Page 58: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 2

1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents and record actual revisions to the Work:

1. Contract Drawings.

2. Specifications.

3. Addenda.

4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract.

5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, samples, material submittals, and

approved shoring plans.

6. Material Safety Data Sheets for all materials used in the construction.

B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.

C. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following:

1. Manufacturer’s name and product model and number.

2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.

3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.

E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual

construction including:

1. Field changes of dimension and detail.

2. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

3. Location and quantity of completed work.

F. Prepare and maintain as-built drawings, showing the location of all work completed on the project. Contract work item designations and quantities to be included on these drawings. Contractor to coordinate as-built information with the Architect / Engineer during the work.

Page 59: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 3

G. Legibly mark each item as a Record Document prepared by Contractor.

H. At the end of the project, Contractor shall provide three (3) sets of final as-built drawings in CAD Format in paper and electronic format for the Engineer/Owner.

1.05 FINAL STRUCTURE WALKTHROUGH/PUNCHLIST

A. Upon completion of all contract work, the Contractor will notify the Architect / Engineer in writing that all work is completed and that a final walkthrough review of the structure is requested for the purpose of final punchlist preparation.

B. The Contractor shall review the project prior to written notification to verify

completeness of all contract work. The intent of final punchlist preparation is not to identify contract work not performed but to review completed work for conformance with project specifications.

C. Upon receipt of the final punchlist from the Architect / Engineer, the Contractor

has one week to complete all punchlist items, unless otherwise approved by the Owner (work hours to be approved by the Owner). After the one week period, the Architect / Engineer will review the project site and verify completeness of the punchlist items. For any punchlist items not completed during this period as identified by the Architect / Engineer during his review, the Owner has the right to complete the remaining work outside the contract and deduct the cost of this work from the Contractor's final payment on the project.

D. Any punchlist review time spent by the Architect / Engineer beyond the two

reviews outlined above, will be paid by the Contractor at the Architect / Engineer's current Fee and Rate Schedule by deducting these fees from the Contractor's final payment on the project.

1.06 WARRANTIES

A. Provide duplicate original copies to the Owner for all warranties/guarantees in accordance with project specifications. Provide one copy of all warranties/guarantees to the Architect.

B. All warranties/guarantees are to be addressed to the Owner, not the

Architect. C. All warranties/guarantees will provide labor and material for both material

and workmanship deficiencies during the warranty period.

Page 60: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout August 24, 2017

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 4

D. All warranties/guarantees shall include the following:

1. Name of product installed.

2. Location of product installation.

3. Quantity of product installed.

4. Final completion date of project as start date of warranty period.

E. Execute and assemble applicable documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and

manufacturers.

F. Provide Table of Contents and assemble all warranties/guarantees in three ring binders with durable plastic cover.

G. Provide warranties/guarantees prior to submitting final Application for Payment

of retainage.

H. For items of Work delayed beyond the Contract Date of Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

1.07 WAIVERS OF LIEN

A. Provide sworn statement and full unconditional waiver of lien for total project cost.

B. Provide individual full unconditional waivers of lien from all material suppliers

and subcontractors.

END OF SECTION

Page 61: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout Agusut 24, 2017

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-1

SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

1. GENERAL 1.01. WORK INCLUDES

A. The Contractor will:

1. Maintain one copy of:

a. Contract drawings, including separate volume(s) of details. b. Project Manual c. Interpretations and supplemental instructions d. Addenda e. Reviewed, approved shop drawings and product data f. Other modifications to contract g. Field test records h. All schedules i. Correspondence file

2. Store documents in temporary field office/other apart from documents used for field construction.

3. Provide files and racks for document storage.

4. File documents in format in accord with Project Manual Table of Contents.

5. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition.

6. Do not use record documents for field construction purposes.

7. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Engineer and Owner.

1.02. RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples

1.03. MARKING DEVICES

A. Provide colored pencils/ballpoint pens/felt tip marking pens/other for marking.

1.04. RECORDING

A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS" in 2" high printed letters.

B. Keep record documents current.

C. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded.

D. Contract drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction: 1. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction

referenced to visible and accessible features of structure.

Page 62: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

MPEA 5th Floor Office Buildout Agusut 24, 2017

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-2

2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Changes made by change order. 4. Details not on original contract drawings.

E. Specifications and addenda: Legibly mark up each section to record:

1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed.

2. Changes made by change order or field order. 3. Other matters not originally specified.

F. Shop Drawings: Maintain as record documents; legibly annotate drawings

to record changes made after review. 1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. At completion of project, deliver record documents to Engineer. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:

1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor’s name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate 6. Signature of Contractor, or his authorized representative

END OF SECTION 01720

Page 63: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

GENERALPART 1 -

DEFINITIONS1.1

Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unlessA.indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to OwnerB.ready for reuse.

Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, andC.reinstall them where indicated.

Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are notD.otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS1.2

Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements inA.Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."

Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements inB.Section 01 31 00"Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and proceduresrelated to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:

Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.1.Review structural load limitations of existing structure.2.Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,3.demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoiddelays.Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed4.by selective demolition operations.Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.5.Review phasing requirements.6.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.3

Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition workA.similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

Professional Engineer Qualifications: Comply with Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."B.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONCopyright 2017 Gensler

02 41 19 - 1

Page 64: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations beforeC.beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.D.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.4

Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.A.Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 14 00 "Work Restrictions."1.

Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.B.

Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by1.Owner as far as practical.

Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in theC.Work.

Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work .1.If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;2.immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed byOwner under a separate contract.

Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in building to be selectively demolished.D.A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine reportto become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.1.Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials2.except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.E.

Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect themF.against damage during selective demolition operations.

Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.1.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONCopyright 2017 Gensler

02 41 19 - 2

Page 65: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

WARRANTY1.5

Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damagedA.during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existingwarranties.

If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to patch the exposed Work listed below1.that is damaged during selective demolition. If it is impossible to engage originalInstaller or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm.

Processed concrete finishes.a.Stonework and stone masonry.b.Ornamental metal.c.Matched-veneer woodwork.d.Preformed metal panels.e.Roofing.f.Firestopping.g.Window wall system.h.Stucco and ornamental plaster.i.Terrazzo.j.Finished wood flooring.k.Fluid-applied flooring.l.Aggregate wall coating.m.Wall covering.n.Swimming pool finishes.o.HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers.p.

Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifyingB.that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentationat Project closeout.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

REPAIR MATERIALS2.1

Use repair materials identical to existing materials.A.

If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use1.materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.2.

Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual SpecificationB.Sections.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONCopyright 2017 Gensler

02 41 19 - 3

Page 66: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1

Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals,A.gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding withselective demolition operations.

Pest Control: Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control1.rodents and vermin before and during selective demolition operations.

Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removalB.operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and otheradjacent occupied and used facilities.

Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used1.facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Providealternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governingregulations.Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered2.passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.3.Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip4.line of groups of trees to remain.

Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to preventC.injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and1.to and from occupied portions of building.Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of2.existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakageand damage to structure and interior areas.Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are3.exposed during selective demolition operations.Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.4.Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling5.specified in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building andD.construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other constructionoperations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for buildingexterior.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONCopyright 2017 Gensler

02 41 19 - 4

Page 67: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide1.insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and materialdrying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.

Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures toE.limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.

Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior shoring, bracing, and structural supports toF.preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction indicated toremain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction beingdemolished.

Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.1.

POLLUTION CONTROLS3.2

Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spreadA.of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.

Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or1.objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition2.enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.

Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacentB.surfaces and areas.

Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that1.will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

PATCHING AND REPAIRS3.3

General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolitionA.operations.

Patching: Comply with Section 01 73 00 "Execution."B.

Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable forC.new materials.

Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with1.an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's writtenrecommendations.

Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoiningD.construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONCopyright 2017 Gensler

02 41 19 - 5

Page 68: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area intoE.another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface ofuniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings andreplace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply1.with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats2.over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch.Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity3.of installation.

Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-planeF.surface of uniform appearance.

DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS3.4

General: Except for items or materials indicated to be[ recycled,] reused, salvaged, reinstalled,A.or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Projectsite and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.1.Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces2.and areas.Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that3.will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste4.Management and Disposal."

Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.B.

Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.C.

Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them accordingD.to Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

CLEANING3.5

Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selectiveA.demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolitionoperations began.

END OF SECTION 02 41 19

SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONCopyright 2017 Gensler

02 41 19 - 6

Page 69: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 03 54 16 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling underlayment forA.application below interior floor coverings.

COORDINATION1.2

Coordinate cement-based underlayment with requirements of finish flooring products,A.including adhesives, specified in Division 09 Sections.

Before installing surface sealers, if recommended by underlayment manufacturer, verify1.compatibility with finish flooring installation adhesives.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4

Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer and factory trained forA.application of underlayment products required for this Project.

Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify inB.writing that products are compatible.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5

Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration fromA.moisture or other detrimental effects.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.6

Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrateA.temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affectingunderlayment performance.

Place hydraulic-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and1.temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.

HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENTCopyright 2017 Gensler

03 54 16 - 1

Page 70: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS2.1

Hydraulic Cement Underlayment: Portland cement-based, polymer-modified, products that canA.be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch and that can be feathered at edges tomatch adjacent floor elevations.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.

ARDEX GmbH; K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete.a.BASF, Master Builders Solutions; MasterTop 111SL.b.L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Levelex.c.MAPEI Corporation; Ultraplan 1 Plus.d.PARACHEM; Parabond PFU.e.

Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic2.cement as defined by ASTM C 219.Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to3.ASTM C 109/C 109M.

Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as recommended byB.underlayment manufacturer.

Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for1.underlayment thickness required.

Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.C.

Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,D.conditions, and application indicated.

Surface Sealer: Designed to reduce porosity as recommended by manufacturer for type of floorE.covering to be applied to underlayment.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Use a 10-foot straightedge to check floor flatness.A.

Mark with a pencil areas where flatness tolerances exceed 1/8-inch over a 10 foot span.B.

HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENTCopyright 2017 Gensler

03 54 16 - 2

Page 71: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance ofC.underlayment including substrate moisture content. Begin underlayment application only afterunsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION3.2

Prepare and clean substrates indicated to receive underlayment according to manufacturer’sA.written instructions. Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for underlayment application.

Treat nonmoving substrate cracks with a crack filler or elastomeric compound in1.accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds,B.form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, existing flooring adhesive residues, existing paintdroppings, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond according to theunderlayment manufacturer's written instructions.

Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlaymentC.according to manufacturer's written instructions.

APPLICATION3.3

General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's writtenA.instructions.

Coordinate application of components, including primer, to provide optimum1.underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion.

Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.B.

Apply underlayment to produce uniform, surface that is completely flat at areas indicated toC.receive self leveling type underlayment.

Flatness tolerance: Do not exceed 1/4-inch over a 10 foot span.1.Maximum height of ridges: 1/16-inch.2.Apply a final layer without aggregate if required to produce smooth surface.3.Feather edges as required for smooth transitions to adjacent floor elevations.4.

Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contaminationD.during application and curing processes.

Do not install finish flooring over underlayment until after time period recommended byE.underlayment manufacturer.

Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, includingF.areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENTCopyright 2017 Gensler

03 54 16 - 3

Page 72: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

PROTECTION3.4

Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.A.

END OF SECTION 03 54 16

HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENTCopyright 2017 Gensler

03 54 16 - 4

Page 73: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section Includes:A.

Decorative concrete masonry units.1.Pre-faced concrete masonry units.2.Mortar and grout.3.Steel reinforcing bars.4.Masonry-joint reinforcement.5.Embedded flashing.6.

Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section:B.

Cast-stone trim in unit masonry.1.Steel lintels in unit masonry.2.Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry.3.Cavity wall insulation.4.

ALLOWANCES1.2

Face brick is part of the Face Brick Allowance.A.

DEFINITIONS1.3

CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).A.

Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.B.

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS1.4

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.A.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5

Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in anA.enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. Ifunits become wet, do not install until they are dry.

UNIT MASONRYCopyright 2017 Gensler

04 20 00 - 1

Page 74: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do notB.use cementitious materials that have become damp.

Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained andC.contamination avoided.

Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dryD.mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in coveredweatherproof dispensing silos.

Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirtE.and oil.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.6

Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills withA.waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry whenconstruction is not in progress.

Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely1.in place.Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,2.secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe, and holdcover in place.

Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at leastB.three days after building masonry walls or columns.

Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be leftC.exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with suchmasonry.

Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading1.coverings on ground and over wall surface.Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.2.Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and3.integral finishes, from mortar droppings.Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from4.splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with iceD.or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frostor by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained inTMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

UNIT MASONRYCopyright 2017 Gensler

04 20 00 - 2

Page 75: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 401.deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven daysafter completing cleaning.

Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained inE.TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installationA.tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental1.to performance of the Work.Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.2.Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.3.Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.4.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.2

Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thicknessA.shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widthsindicated.

Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installingB.equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.

Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuousC.pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Installcut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors andD.textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.E.

UNIT MASONRYCopyright 2017 Gensler

04 20 00 - 3

Page 76: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.F.per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are dampbut not wet at time of laying.

TOLERANCES3.3

Dimensions and Locations of Elements:A.

For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or1.minus 1/4 inch.For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or2.minus 1/2 inch.For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus3.or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

Lines and Levels:B.

For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/41.inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary2.from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,3.3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and4.expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet,1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/85.inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/46.inch in 10 feet or 1/2-inch maximum.For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more7.than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified forwarpage of units.

Joints:C.

For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,1.with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more2.than 1/8 inch.For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/83.inch or minus 1/4 inch.For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus4.1/8 inch.For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line5.by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

UNIT MASONRYCopyright 2017 Gensler

04 20 00 - 4

Page 77: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

LAYING MASONRY WALLS3.4

Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform jointA.thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, atother locations.

Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those inB.course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receivemortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying freshmasonry.

Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.C.

Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer ofD.metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, andE.similar items unless otherwise indicated.

MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING3.5

Lay CMUs as follows:A.

Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.1.Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.2.Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.3.Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where4.cells are not grouted.Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed5.anchors and ties in mortar.

Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficientB.mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush headjoints.

Lay structural clay tile as follows:C.

Lay vertical-cell units with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Provide bed joints1.with full mortar coverage on face shells and webs.Lay horizontal-cell units with full bed joints unless otherwise indicated. Keep drainage2.channels, if any, free of mortar. Form head joints with sufficient mortar so excess will besqueezed out as units are placed in position. Butter both sides of units to be placed, orbutter one side of unit already in place and one side of unit to be placed.Maintain joint thicknesses indicated except for minor variations required to maintain3.bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 1/4- to 3/8-inch- thick joints.

UNIT MASONRYCopyright 2017 Gensler

04 20 00 - 5

Page 78: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Set trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similarD.holes.

Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting.1.Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.2.Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant.3.

Rake out mortar joints at to a uniform depth of 1/4 inch and point with epoxy mortar to complyE.with epoxy-mortar manufacturer's written instructions.

Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than jointF.thickness unless otherwise indicated.

For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch or more in width.1.

MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT3.6

Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.A.

Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.B.

Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.C.

ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE3.7

Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steelA.or concrete, to comply with the following:

Provide an open space not less than [1/2 inch] [1 inch] [2 inches] wide between masonry1.and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free ofmortar and other rigid materials.Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.2.Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c.3.horizontally.

REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION3.8

Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to supportA.reinforced masonry elements during construction.

Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened1.sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on themduring construction.

Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.B.

UNIT MASONRYCopyright 2017 Gensler

04 20 00 - 6

Page 79: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enoughC.strength to resist grout pressure.

Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 12.67 ft..1.

REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING3.9

Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwiseA.damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; installin fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, andB.completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacentconstruction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,where indicated.

In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to removeC.mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:D.

Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes1.or chisels.Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for2.comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceedingwith cleaning of masonry.Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering3.them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof maskingtape.Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by4.rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL3.10

Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor'sA.property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess orB.soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing withfill material as fill is placed.

Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of1.masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.2.

Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.C.

UNIT MASONRYCopyright 2017 Gensler

04 20 00 - 7

Page 80: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, asD.described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner'sproperty.

END OF SECTION 04 20 00

UNIT MASONRYCopyright 2017 Gensler

04 20 00 - 8

Page 81: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS

GENERALPART 1 -

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.1

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including plans, elevations, sections, details ofA.installation, and attachments to other Work. For installed products indicated to comply withperformance requirements, include structural analysis data, for information only, and shopdrawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for theirpreparation.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.2

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural WeldingA.Code--Steel." Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests forwelding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction,B.verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shopdrawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying theWork.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE2.1

Countertop Framing: Provide countertop framing capable of withstanding the followingA.structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materialsinvolved, including anchors and connections, or of exhibiting excessive deflections in any ofthe components making up the countertops:

All deadloads.1.500 pound live load placed on the countertop.2.Deflection at Midspan: L/1000 times span or 1/8-inch whichever is less.3.

Frameless Door Framing: Fabricate and install concealed framing for frameless doors so that,B.when installed, it is capable of supporting all deadloads and withstanding the live loadsimposed on it from the operation of the frameless doors.

All-Glass Entrances and Storefront Framing: Fabricate and install all-glass entrances andC.storefront framing so that when installed, it is capable of supporting all deadloads andwithstanding the live loads imposed on it from the operation of the all-glass entrance doors.

METAL FABRICATIONSCopyright 2017 Gensler

05 50 00 - 1

Page 82: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

MATERIALS2.2

Metal Surfaces: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provideA.materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposedpitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.B.

Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500, or hot-formed steelC.tubing complying with ASTM A 501.

Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot and with flangedD.edges returned toward web complying with MFMA-3 and fabricated from steel complying withASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Width, depth, and metal thickness as required to suit performancerequirements.

Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloyE.welded.

Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkydF.primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664 and compatible with finishpaint systems indicated.

Fasteners: Zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941,G.Class Fe/Zn 5, of type, grade, and class required by application indicated.

FABRICATION2.3

Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize fieldA.splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handlinglimitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark unitsfor reassembly and coordinated installation. Welded connections may be used where boltedconnections are shown.

Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.B.

Weld corners and seams continuously along entire line of contact. Use full penetration welds.C.Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength of base metals.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposedwelds smooth and blended.

Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fastenersD.where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Make up threadedconnections tight so that threads are entirely concealed.

METAL FABRICATIONSCopyright 2017 Gensler

05 50 00 - 2

Page 83: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate andE.space anchoring devices and fasteners to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and tosupport indicated loads.

Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,F.and similar items.

MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS2.4

Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and asA.necessary to complete the Work and which are not a part of the structural framework, includingbut not limited to framing and supports for sliding doors, countertop, projection screens,ceiling-hung audio/visual equipment, tube framing for partial height walls, and mechanical andelectrical equipment.

Fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unlessB.otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary toreceive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units toreceive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

Frameless Door Framing: Fabricate and install concealed framing for frameless doors by1.providing continuous steel shapes with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces asrequired to sustain imposed loads.All-Glass Entrances and Storefront Framing: Fabricate and install all-glass entrances and2.storefront framing by providing continuous steel shapes with attached bearing plates,anchors, and braces as required to sustain imposed loads.Countertop Framing: Fabricate framing, using steel shapes and plates, and cold finished3.mild steel bars at exposed conditions, for support framing and plywood, to thethicknesses, sizes and shapes shown, and as required to produce work of adequatestrength and durability, without objectionable deflections. Use proven details offabrication, as required, to achieve proper assembly and alignment of the variouscomponents of the Work.

FINISHING2.5

Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual forA.Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.Shop prime ferrous-metal items.

Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces for shop priming by removing oil, grease, and similarB.contaminants in accordance with SSPC -SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning," followed with SSPC-SP 3,"Power Tool Cleaning."

METAL FABRICATIONSCopyright 2017 Gensler

05 50 00 - 3

Page 84: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Apply a minimum of one coat of shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, exceptC.those to be field welded, and those to be embedded in sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry,unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1,"for shop painting.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing metal fabrications to in-placeA.construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications.Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true.Drill holes for bolts to the exact diameter of the bolt. Provide screws threaded full length to thescrew head.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that areB.not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

For field welding, use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength ofC.base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately.At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so noroughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

Touchup surfaces and finishes after erection. For materials exposed to view in the finishedD.Project, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touchup paint with thesame material as used for shop painting.

END OF SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONSCopyright 2017 Gensler

05 50 00 - 4

Page 85: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes miscellaneous carpentry.A.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.2

Product Data: Submit product data for each type of process and factory-fabricated productA.indicated.

Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and1.certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.3

Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; for lumber and plywood pressure treated withA.waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL2.1

Lumber: Comply with DOC PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and applicableA.rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards CommitteeBoard of Review.

Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.1.Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for2.moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressedsizes for dry lumber.Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.3.Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for4.2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.

Wood Panels:B.

Plywood: Comply with DOC PS 1 "Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood1.panels. Use exterior grade for panels in wet conditions.

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRYCopyright 2017 Gensler

06 10 53 - 1

Page 86: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness2.indicated.

FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS2.2

General: Provide chemical fire retardant process tested and labeled by UL with flame spreadA.and smoke developed ratings of 25 or less. Comply with performance requirements in AWPAU1, Use Category UCFA as a minimum for pressure treatment. Size wood before treatment sothat minimum cutting will be required after treatment. Kiln dry lumber to a maximum 19percent moisture content, kiln dry plywood to a maximum 15 percent moisture content, aftertreatment. Treat indicated items and the following:

Wood members required to be treated by Building Code having jurisdiction at the site1.and wood members specified as fire-retardant-treated.

Fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood shall comply with VOC content as shown in SectionB.01 81 23 "CALgreen Requirements."

Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL.C.

MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER2.3

Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction, includingA.blocking, nailers, and similar members.

PANEL PRODUCTS2.4

Concealed Plywood for Countertop Underlayment:A.

Telephone, [Data, ][Security, ][Stretched Fabric Wall System Artwork Blocking, ][Mirror,] andB.Electrical Equipment Backing Panels:

APA, Exposure 1, C-C Plugged, fire-retardant treated, manufactured with no added1.urea-formaldehyde, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than [15/32inch]3/4 inch] thick.

FASTENERS2.5

General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specifiedA.in this Article for material and manufacture.

Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer headsB.and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRYCopyright 2017 Gensler

06 10 53 - 2

Page 87: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,C.where indicated, flat washers.

Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below withD.capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed inconcrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independenttesting and inspecting agency.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. FitA.carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers,blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognizedB.standards.

Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoidC.splitting wood.

WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION3.2

Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicatedA.and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with otherwork involved.

Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,B.unless otherwise indicated.

PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION3.3

General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APAA.Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," and local utility requirements, if any,for plywood backing panels utilized as indicated.

Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:B.

Countertop Underlayment: Bolt to miscellaneous steel framing.1.Plywood Backing Panels: Secure to wall using proper fastening devices for substrates2.encountered spaced 12 inches on center maximum at perimeter 1/2 inch from corners andthree rows of 3 fasteners each in the backerboard field. Countersink fasteners flush withplywood surface. Butt adjacent panels without lapping.

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRYCopyright 2017 Gensler

06 10 53 - 3

Page 88: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

END OF SECTION 06 10 53

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRYCopyright 2017 Gensler

06 10 53 - 4

Page 89: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 06 40 23 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes, but is not limited to, the following items of interior architectural woodwork:A.

Plastic-laminate cabinets.1.Plastic-laminate countertops.2.Closet and utility shelving.3.Interior frames and jambs.4.Interior standing and running trim.5.Shop priming of interior woodwork to receive painted finish.6.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.2

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing locations of each item, dimensioned plans andA.elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other componentsShow locations andsizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcementspecified in other Sections. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing,electrical, computer and telephone equipment and other items installed in architecturalwoodwork. Elevations shall be drawn at a scale of not less than 1/2" = 1'-0" . Details shall bedrawn at a scale of not less than 3" = 1'=0" .

Samples: Submit the following:B.

Plastic laminate materials, 3 inches square.1.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.3

Quality Standard: Fabricate and install all architectural woodwork in accordance with theA.applicable requirements of Architectural Woodwork Standards, 2nd edition, published jointlyby AWI, AWMAC, and WI, unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown.

Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials identical to those tested for the followingB.fire performance characteristics per ASTM test methods indicated by UL or other testing andinspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify treated lumberwith classification marking of inspecting and testing organization in the form of separablepaper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, of imprint on lumber surfacesthat will be concealed from view after installation.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORKCopyright 2017 Gensler

06 40 23 - 1

Page 90: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Surface Burning Characteristics for Concealed Blocking, Furring, and Door Subframing: NotC.exceeding a flame spread of 25, and smoke developed of 50 when tested per ASTM E 84 for 30minutes.

The fire performance finish requirements for all exposed interior wall and ceiling woodworkD.(including the paneling, but not limited to paneling) substrates in fully sprinklered spaces shallcomply with IBC 2012, Table 803.5.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.4

Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wetA.work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relativehumidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the constructionperiod.

Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify actualB.dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication ofwoodwork; and indicate measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabricationschedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Locate concealed framing,blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before beingenclosed and indicate measurements on shop drawings.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS2.1

General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for eachA.type of woodwork and quality grade specified.

Lumber Standards: Comply with applicable provisions for grading and workmanship of AWSB.Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 3, and the requirements shown and specified;where standards conflict the more stringent shall apply. Provide lumber surfaced 4 sides (S4S)and fabricated to profiles shown. All lumber shall be kiln dried to the moisture contentindicated in AWS, Section 2.

Furring, Blocking, Shims: No. 1 Common; Southern Pine.C.

Solid Hardwood for Opaque Finish: Plain sawn Yellow Poplar, free from checks, splits, soundD.knots.

Wood Panel Products:E.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORKCopyright 2017 Gensler

06 40 23 - 2

Page 91: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, having a minimum 48 pcfdensity1.except that minimum for screw holding capacity on face shall be 300 pounds; an ASTME 84 minimum Class C flame spread rating, minimum 3/4 inches thick, edged and facedas specified, fabricated with binder containing no added urea formaldehyde. Providemoisture-resistant MDF when subject to wetting.Hardboard: ANSI A135.4.2.Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive3.containing no urea formaldehyde.

Thermoset Decorative Overlay (Melamine): Medium-density fiberboard with surface ofF.thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with the recommendationsof the Composite Panel Association's Technical Bulletin "Laminating Composite Panels."

High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: Provide product indicated in Finish Schedule.G.

Backing Sheets: Non-decorative, high pressure laminate, NEMA LD3, Grade, types and1.thickness to match face sheets and equalize pull.

Adhesives: Use only low emitting VOC adhesives that leave no glue lines on finished surfacesH.of architectural woodwork. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. Useinstallation adhesives that do not exceed the following limits for VOC content when calculatedaccording to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

Wood Glues: 30 g/L.1.Contact Adhesives: 80 g/L.2.

Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials: Where indicated, use materials impregnated withI.fire-retardant chemical formulations indicated by a pressure process or other means acceptableto authorities having jurisdiction to produce products with fire-test-response characteristicsspecified.

Do not use treated material that does not comply with requirements of referenced1.woodworking standard. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, discolored, or otherwisedamaged or defective lumber or panel products.Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise2.adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated materialfrom untreated material.Treat only door subframing, blocking and furring items.3.

CABINET HARDWARE2.2

Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMAA.numbers or items referenced to this standard.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORKCopyright 2017 Gensler

06 40 23 - 3

Page 92: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Frameless Concealed Hinges for Cabinet Doors (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602.B.Bright nickel finish (US15). Provide hinge quantity as recommended by hinge manufacturerbased on cabinet door width, weight, thickness, door material, and hinge cup selection.

Edge Pulls: Full mortised, solid, bronze or brass door edge pull, with 1/2 inch fingerC.clearance, 1/4 inch diameter roll diameter, having nominal overall roll length dimension of 3inches long, with backbend drilled and countersunk to receive 2 screw fasteners; form for fullmortise application; satin finished chrome (US26D); one of the following:

SRO Style Edge Pull; Tydix Products, Inc. Morro Bay, CA.1.

Cabinet Shelf Rests: Provide one of the following:D.

Hafele America, Co.; Hafele 282.01.701 x 282.50.704.1.Knape and Vogt; 331 Series Flat Top Shelf Support Pin with 325 Series Insert Grommet.2.

Drawer Slides:E.

Pencil Drawer Slides: Accuride, Inc.; Model No. 2132 or 2006.1.Drawers less than 4 inches deep: Accuride, Inc.; Model No. 7432, 100 lb. capacity2.medium duty load rating, bright electro zinc plate finish.Drawers greater than 4 inches but less than 8 inches deep: Accuride, Inc.; Model No.3.7432, 100 lb. capacity medium duty load rating, bright electro zinc plate finish.Drawers greater than 8 inches deep: Accuride, Inc.; Model No. 4032, 150 lb. capacity4.heavy duty load rating, bright electro zinc plate finish.Refuse Cabinets: Accuride, Inc.; Model No. 3600-201, 175 lb. capacity heavy duty load5.rating, bright electro zinc plate finish.Flipper Door Slides: Accuride, Inc.; Model No. 1432, bright electro zinc plate finish.6.

Silencers: Provide rubber silencers on jamb and/or head and sill strike areas of all cabinetF.doors and drawers, 2 for paired doors, and 3 for single doors. Silencers shall be approximately1/4 inch diameter, color compatible with adjacent finish.

Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-1/2 inch metal grommets and matchingG.caps with slot for wire passage.

Exposed Hardware Finishes: Unless otherwise specified above, or on the Drawings, allH.exposed portions of the woodwork hardware shall comply with BHMA A156.18 for BHMAfinish number indicated.

Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.1.Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.2.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORKCopyright 2017 Gensler

06 40 23 - 4

Page 93: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

FABRICATION2.3

Fabrication: Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application,A.before shipment to Project site to the maximum extent possible. Disassemble components onlyas necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provideallowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. The width of scribe and filler panels shall notexceed 1/2 inch , or 1/2 inch clear dimension from adjacent wall to outside face of cabinet doorin a 90 degree position, whichever is greater.

Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Custom Grade at plastic laminate-finished woodwork andB.woodwork primed for field painting.

Wood Cabinets for Plastic Laminate Finish:C.

AWS Type of Cabinet Construction: Comply with AWS Section 10, Style 1, Type A1.Construction; flush overlay.Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: Grade HGS for horizontal surfaces other than2.tops and edges; Grade HGP for postformed surfaces; Grade VGS for vertical surfaces.Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure3.decorative laminate, Grade VGS.Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.4.Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.5.

Plastic Laminate Countertops: Comply with AWS Section 11, and as follows:D.

High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.1.Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces unless otherwise2.indicated.Core Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood.3.

Interior Standing and Running Trim: Comply with AWS Sections 3 and 6, and as follows:E.

Fabricate from solid hardwood with scarfed joints, profiles as indicated, finishes as1.indicated. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide,flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.Wood Species: Poplar for opaque finishes.2.

SHOP FINISHING2.4

Production finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup,A.cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

Priming of interior architectural woodwork with field applied opaque finish required to beB.performed at fabrication shop are specified in this Section. Refer to Section 09 91 23 "InteriorPainting" for finishing opaque finished architectural woodwork.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORKCopyright 2017 Gensler

06 40 23 - 5

Page 94: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, fillingC.countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishingarchitectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to1.concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end grainsurfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not requirebackpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorativeoverlay.

Exposed Surfaces:D.

Primed for Field Painting: Shop-applied primer compatible with finish coats specified in1.Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."Plastic Laminate Finish: Gluing of plastic laminate surfacing materials shall be by the hot2.plate method, glued surfaces shall be in close contact throughout. Glue stains shall not bepermitted.

Unexposed Wood Finish: Shop-applied alkyd type primer-sealer.E.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Install woodwork to comply with AWS Section 10 for the same grade specified in this SectionA.for type of woodwork involved.

Install woodwork level, plumb, true, with no distortions, and with no variations in flushness ofB.adjoining surfaces. Shim as required with concealed shims.

Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damagedC.finish at cuts.

Anchor woodwork to blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to blockingD.with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation.Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flushwith woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

Install standing and running trim with minimum number of joints possible, using full-lengthE.pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not usepieces less than 96 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarfrunning joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if any, between top ofbase and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORKCopyright 2017 Gensler

06 40 23 - 6

Page 95: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accuratelyF.aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provideunencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.Install cabinets without sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Fasten wall cabinetsthrough back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches on center with No. 10wafer-head screws sized for 1 inch penetration into wood blocking, or hanging strips or withNo. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wallfinish.

Anchor countertops securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or otherG.supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with siliconesanitary sealant specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." Secure backsplashes to topswith concealed metal brackets at 16 inches on center and to walls with adhesive.

Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or beforeH.installation of woodwork.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.2

Repair damaged and defective woodwork to eliminate functional and visual defects; where notA.possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touchup shop-applied finishes toB.restore damaged or soiled areas.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer, thatC.ensures that woodwork will be without damage or deterioration at time of SubstantialCompletion.

END OF SECTION 06 40 23

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORKCopyright 2017 Gensler

06 40 23 - 7

Page 96: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations throughA.fire-resistance-rated floor, roof, wall and partition assemblies, and smoke barriers, includingboth empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.2

Through-Penetration Firestopping Schedule: Submit, for information only, aA.Through-Penetration Firestopping Schedule indicating the type of through-penetration firestopsystem to be installed for each penetration. Indicate each kind of construction conditionpenetrated and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing andinspection agency acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliancewith requirements for each condition indicated.

Submit documentation, including illustrations, from qualified testing and inspecting agencyB.applicable to each through-penetration firestop.

Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency'sC.illustration to suit a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, withmodifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer'sfire-protection engineer.

At Project Closeout, submit a Record Schedule, signed by the Installer, of systems installed, theD.UL design designations, and the location of each system.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.3

Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified or licensed, by firestop systemA.manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's productsaccording to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestop systemmaterials to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself conferqualification on the buyer.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the followingB.requirements:

Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to1.authorities having jurisdiction.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

07 84 13 - 1

Page 97: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced on the2.Drawings. Provide rated systems bearing classification marking of qualified testing andinspecting agency. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond todesignations listed by UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory," Intertek ETL SEMKO in its"Directory of Listed Building Products," or FM Global in its "Building MaterialsApproval Guide."

FIELD CONDITIONS1.4

Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions byA.natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

COORDINATION1.5

Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetrationA.firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodateB.through-penetration firestop systems.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL2.1

Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire accordingA.to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain originalfire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall becompatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating itemsif any.

VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with theB.following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPAMethod 24):

Sealants: 250 g/L.1.Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.2.Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.3.

Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed toC.install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified bypenetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agencyfor firestopping indicated.

Gypsum Products: The use of gypsum products for through-penetration firestopping is strictlyD.prohibited.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

07 84 13 - 2

Page 98: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING2.2

Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratingsA.determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of0.01-inch wg.

F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.1.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION AND IDENTIFICATION3.1

Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructionsA.and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprintedB.vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides ofeach firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to removepenetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels:

The words: "Warning--Through-Penetration Firestop System--Do Not Disturb. Notify1.Building Management of Any Damage."Contractor's name, address, and phone number.2.Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting3.agency.Date of installation.4.Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.5.Installer's name.6.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.2

Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and withA.cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop systemmanufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensureB.through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of SubstantialCompletion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and removedamaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install newmaterials to produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with specifiedrequirements.

END OF SECTION 07 84 13

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

07 84 13 - 3

Page 99: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes interior joint sealants.A.

SUBMITTALS1.2

Product Data: Submit product data for each joint sealant product indicated.A.

Samples: Submit samples for each exposed joint sealant product indicated.B.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.3

Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers. Store and handle materials inA.compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS, GENERAL2.1

VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside theA.weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content whencalculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

Architectural Sealants: Not more than 250 g/L.1.Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: Not more than 250 g/L.2.Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: Not more than 775 g/L.3.

Colors: For fully concealed joints, provide the manufacturer's standard color of sealant whichB.has the best overall performance characteristics for the application shown. For exposed joints,the Architect will select colors from the manufacturer's standard colors.

JOINT SEALANTS2.2

Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant (use for joints at plumbing fixtures, toilet room countertopsA.and vanities): Complying with ASTM C 920, Type S (single component), Grade NS (non-sag),class 25, Use NT (non-traffic), Substrate uses G, A, and O; and containing a fungicide formildew resistance; white color.

JOINT SEALANTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

07 92 00 - 1

Page 100: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Products: Provide one of the following:1.

Dow Corning; 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant.a.Momentive; Sanitary SCS 1700.b.Pecora Corporation; 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant.c.Tremco, an RPM Co.; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.d.

Latex Sealant: Complying with ASTM C 834, Type OP (opaque sealants):B.

JOINT-SEALANT BACKING2.3

General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatibleA.with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applicationsindicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

Cylindrical Sealant Backings: One of the following preformed, compressible, resilient,B.nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding backings of flexible plastic foam complying with ASTMC 1330, and of type indicated below. Select shape and density of cylindrical sealant backingsin consultation with the manufacturer for proper performance in specific condition of use ineach case.

Type C: Closed-cell polyethylene foam material with a surface skin, which is1.nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, non-outgassing in unruptured state; one of thefollowing:

HBR Closed Cell Backer Rod; Nomaco, Inc.a.MasterSeal 920; BASF Master Builders.b.Mile High Foam, Backer Rod Mfg., Inc.c.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.4

Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealantsA.and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining orharming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated topromote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and whichB.will not stain nor mar the finish of surfaces adjacent to joints to which it is applied.

JOINT SEALANTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

07 92 00 - 2

Page 101: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants toA.comply with the recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the followingrequirements:

Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint1.sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested andapproved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), existing jointsealants, oil, grease, water, and surface dirt.Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of tile, and similar porous joint substrate2.surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination ofthese methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bondwith joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations byvacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.3.Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of tile, and other nonporous4.surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, orleave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoiningB.surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or bycleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after toolingwithout disturbing joint seal.

Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealantsC.during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths ofinstalled sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Installation of Sealants: Install sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates,D.completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform,cross-sectional shapes and depths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning orE.curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform, concave shaped beads, to eliminate airpockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excesssealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.

Cleaning: Clean excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as installation progressesF.by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealantsand of products in which joints occur.

JOINT SEALANTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

07 92 00 - 3

Page 102: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE3.2

Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:A.

Control and Expansion Joints on Exposed Interior Surfaces of Exterior Walls: Latex1.sealant.Vertical Control and Expansion Joints in Tile Surfaces: Latex sealant.2.Horizontal Control and Expansion Joints in Tile Flooring Surfaces: Two-Part3.Polyurethane Sealant for Paving Applications.Vertical Control Joints on Exposed Surfaces of Interior Unit Masonry and Concrete4.Walls and Partitions: Latex sealant.Perimeter Joints between Interior Wall Surfaces and Frames of Interior Doors, Windows,5.and Elevator Entrances: Latex sealant.Perimeter Joints between Scalloped, Bent, or Warped Interior Wallboard Surfaces and6.Straight Trim: Latex Sealant.Joints between Plumbing Fixtures and Adjoining Walls, Floors, and Counters:7.Mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

END OF SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

07 92 00 - 4

Page 103: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes hollow metal doors and frames.A.

The integration of a security system into the hollow metal door and frame work is1.required. The Contractor shall be responsible for the total and complete coordination ofthe security system components into the Work.

Knockdown metal doors frames specified in this Section are limited to Tenant Allowance WorkB.interior doors only. Refer to Section 01 21 00 "Allowances."

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.2

Product Data: Submit product data for each product indicated. Include material descriptions,A.core descriptions, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes for each typeof door and frame specified.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.3

Certificate of Compliance for Fire Rated Doors: Provide copies of Certificate of ComplianceA.for all fire rated door assemblies, all smoke and draft control door assemblies, and alltemperature rise rated door assemblies.

Research/Evaluation Reports: Submit research/evaluation reports from the State of Florida thatB.indicate that the selected hollow metal door and frame assemblies complies with theperformance requirements and is approved for use in the required Wind Zone of the FloridaBuilding Code.

The report shall clearly indicate the Notice of Acceptance (NOA) as published by1.Miami-Dade County, Florida or Florida Product Approval Number as published bycurrent Florida Building Code for each selected exterior hollow metal door and frameassembly being installed for the project.

Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire rated andC.exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification of a testing agency acceptableto authorities having jurisdiction that each door and frame assembly has been constructed tocomply with design, materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeledconstruction.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMESCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 11 13 - 1

Page 104: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4

Hollow Metal Door and Frame Standard: Comply with the applicable provisions andA.recommendations of the following publications by Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association(HMMA) Div. of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM),unless more stringent requirements are indicated in the Contract Documents:

HMMA "Hollow Metal Manual."1.HMMA 861 "Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."2.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing hollow metal doors andB.frames similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-serviceperformance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeledC.by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, forfire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C "Standardfor Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies." Fire classification labels at all doors withfire ratings greater than 20 minutes shall indicate the temperature rise developed on theunexposed surface of the door after the first 30 minutes of fire exposure.

Provide metal labels permanently fastened on each door which is within the size1.limitations established by the labeling authority having jurisdiction.Temperature-Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature-rise2.rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.Positive Pressure Rated Door Assemblies: Where indicated provide positive pressure3.rated fire rated door assemblies. Sizes and configurations as shown on the Drawings.Installed door assemblies shall be in accordance with door manufacturer's certifiedassemblies.

Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed andD.labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fireratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL9.

Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.E.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5

Deliver doors and frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit andA.Project site storage.

Inspect doors and frames, on delivery, for damage. Tool marks, rust, blemishes, and otherB.damage on exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. Remove and replace damaged items asdirected by Architect. Store doors and frames at building site in a dry location, off the ground,and in such a manner as to prevent deterioration.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMESCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 11 13 - 2

Page 105: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1

Hurricane-Resistance Test Performance: Provide exterior door and frame assemblies (door,A.frame and hardware) that pass large and small missile-impact tests, as required by systems'location above grade, and cyclic pressure tests according to testing requirements of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

Windborne-Debris Resistance: Provide exterior hollow metal door and frame assemblies1.capable of resisting impact from windborne large and small missile debris, based on thecriteria as determined from testing exterior hollow metal door and frame assembliesidentical to those specified, according to Testing Application Standard (TAS) 201"Impact Test Procedures" and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.Uniform Static Air Pressure: Provide exterior hollow metal door and frame assemblies2.capable of resisting inward and outward uniform static air pressure difference, based onthe criteria as determined from testing exterior hollow metal door and frame assembliesidentical to those specified, according to Testing Application Standard (TAS) 202"Criteria for Testing Impact and Non-Impact Resistant Building Envelope Componentsusing Uniform Static Air Pressure".Cyclic Load Testing: Provide exterior hollow metal door and frame assemblies capable3.of resisting cyclic loading, based on the criteria as determined from testing exteriorhollow metal door and frame assemblies identical to those specified, according to TestingApplication Standard (TAS) 203 "Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic WindPressure Loading" and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

DOORS2.2

General: Provide flush-design doors, 1-3/4 inches thick, of seamless hollow construction,A.unless otherwise indicated. Construct doors with sheets joined at their vertical edges bycontinuous welding the full height of the door, or joined at vertical edges by 1 inch spot welds 6inches on center, or intermittently welded seams. Voids between spot and intermediate weldsshall be epoxy edge filled Grind and finish all welds and edge fills flush to result in invisibleseams on the door faces or vertical door edges.

Interior Door Core Construction: Doors shall be stiffened by continuous vertically formed steelB.sections which, upon assembly, shall span the full thickness of the interior space between doorfaces. These stiffeners shall be 0.026-inch not more than 6 inches apart and spot welded to facesheets a maximum of 5 inches o.c. Place filler between stiffeners for full height of door.

Fire Door Cores: A continuous mineral fiberboard core permanently bonded to the inside faceC.of the outer face sheet unless otherwise required to provide fire-protection and temperature-riseratings indicated.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMESCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 11 13 - 3

Page 106: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcing from the same material as door to comply withD.the following. Offset reinforcement so that faces of mortised hardware items are flush withdoor surfaces.

Hinges and Pivots: 7 gauge thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 9 inches.1.Lock Front, Strike, and Flushbolt Reinforcements: 12 gauge thick by size as required by2.hardware manufacturer.Lock Reinforcement Units: 14 gauge thick by size as required by hardware manufacturer.3.Closer Reinforcements: 12 gauge thick one-piece channel by size as required by4.hardware manufacturer.Other Hardware Reinforcements: As required for adequate strength and anchorage.5.In lieu of reinforcement specified, hardware manufacturer's recommended reinforcing6.units may be used.

Electrical Requirements: Make provisions for installation of electrical items specifiedE.elsewhere; arrange so wiring can be readily removed and replaced.

Provide all cutouts and reinforcements required for hollow metal doors to accept security1.system components.Doors with Electric Hinges and Pivots: Provide with metal conduit or raceway to permit2.wiring from electric hinge or pivot to other electric door hardware.

Hinge Location: Center for doors less than 90 inches tall or second hinge froma.door bottom for doors greater than 90 inches; top or bottom electric hinge locationsshall not be permitted.

Interior Hollow Metal Doors:F.

Typical Interior Doors: Flush design with 18 gauge thick cold-rolled stretcher-leveled1.steel face sheets and other metal components from hot- or cold-rolled steel sheets.

METALLIC-COATED STEEL FINISHES2.3

General: Clean, treat and prime surfaces of fabricated steel door and frame work, inside andA.out, whether exposed or concealed in the construction.

STEEL SHEET FINISHES2.4

General: Clean, treat and prime surfaces of fabricated steel door and frame work, inside andA.out, whether exposed or concealed in the construction.

Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; removeB.dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale,shavings, filings, and rust, if present, complying with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMESCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 11 13 - 4

Page 107: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after surfaceC.preparation and pretreatment. Apply a sufficient number of coats, baked on, to obtainuniformly smooth exposed surfaces. Touch up surfaces having runs, smears, or bare spots.

Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, corrosion-inhibiting,1.lead- and chromate-free, universal primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptancecriteria; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

General: Install doors and frames according to the referenced standards, the ArchitectA.reviewed shop drawings, and manufacturer's written recommendations and installationinstructions.

Exterior Hollow Metal Doors Assemblies: Install in accordance with the applicable1.provisions of acceptance indicated under the door and frame manufacturer's Notice ofApproval (NOA) as published by Miami-Dade County, Florida or Florida ProductApproval as published by current Florida Building Code.

Frames: Install frames where indicated. Extend frame anchorages below fills and finishes.B.Coordinate the installation of built-in anchors for wall and partition construction as requiredwith other work.

Knock-Down Frames: Install knock-down frames in locations shown, in perfect1.alignment and elevation, plumb, level, straight and true, and free from rack.Welded Frames:2.

Set masonry anchorage devices where required for securing frames to in-placea.concrete or masonry construction.

Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location as specified and1)anchorage device manufacturer's written instructions. Leave drilled holesrough, not reamed, and free of dust and debris.

Placing Frames: Remove temporary spreader bars prior to installation of theb.frames. Set frames accurately in position; plumb; align, and brace securely untilpermanent anchors are set.

At concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure in place with1)machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. Countersink anchors, andfill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.Anchor bottom of frames to floors through floor anchors with threaded2)fasteners.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMESCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 11 13 - 5

Page 108: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Field splice only at approved locations indicated on the shop drawings.3)Weld, grind, and finish as required to conceal evidence of splicing onexposed faces.

At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.3.Existing Frames (Salvaged from Alteration Work): Install salvaged existing frames in4.locations indicated.

Doors:C.

Non-Fire Rated Doors: Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in their respective frames,1.with the following clearances:

Jambs and Head: 3/32 inch.a.Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch.b.Bottom: 3/8 inch, if no threshold or carpet.c.Bottom: 1/8 inch, at threshold or carpet.d.

Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances as specified in NFPA 80.2.Smoke Control Doors: Install according to NFPA 105.3.Existing Doors (Salvaged from Alteration Work): Install salvaged existing doors in4.locations indicated.

Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with hollowD.metal manufacturer's written instructions.

Secure stops with countersunk flat or oval head machine screws spaced uniformly not1.more than 9 inches2 inches

Wood Door Installation: Refer to 08 14 16 "Flush Wood Doors."E.

Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions and Section 08 71 00F."Door Hardware." Drill and tap for machine screws as required. Do not use self tapping sheetmetal screws. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs, and tocontact stops uniformly. Adjust hardware items just prior to final inspection. Leave work incomplete and proper operating condition.

Exterior Hollow Metal Door Assemblies: Install hardware in accordance with the1.applicable provisions of acceptance indicated under the door and frame manufacturer'sNotice of Approval (NOA) as published by Miami-Dade County, Florida or FloridaProduct Approval as published by current Florida Building Code.

Field cut existing hollow metal doors and frames indicated to receive new hardware.2.Field cutting shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall not void the existingdoor and frame labeling.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMESCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 11 13 - 6

Page 109: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING3.2

Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items just before final inspection.A.Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work,including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas ofB.prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.

Finish Painting: Refer to Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" "1.

Stainless-Steel Touchup: Immediately after erection, smooth abraded areas of stainless steelC.and polish and clean to match undamaged finish.

Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, orD.otherwise defective.

Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period toE.ensure that the hollow metal doors and frames will be without damage or deterioration, at timeof Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 08 11 13

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMESCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 11 13 - 7

Page 110: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 08 12 16 - INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes extruded aluminum frames for interior locations.A.

SUBMITTALS1.2

Product Data: Submit product data for each product indicated. Include material descriptionsA.for each type of frame specified.

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing scaled elevations, plans, and sections of theB.interior aluminum frame work. Full scale sections shall be prepared and submitted for detailsof the assemblies that cannot be shown in the elevations or sections. Include with shopdrawings glass thicknesses, metal finishes, and all other pertinent information as necessary orrequested by the Architect to indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.3

Installer Qualifications: Subcontract the interior frame work to a firm who has successfullyA.installed interior aluminum framing systems similar in material, design, and extent to thoseindicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record ofsuccessful in-service performance.

Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum frames through one source from a single manufacturerB.with the capacity and resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance andphysical properties.

Product Options: Drawings indicate dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles ofC.components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoiningconstruction dimensions. Other manufacturers' products complying with requirements may beconsidered. Refer to Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements."

Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with1.Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatorydata to Architect for review.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.4

Packaging of components shall be so selected to protect the components from damage duringA.shipping and handling.

INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMESCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 12 16 - 1

Page 111: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Storage on Site: Store components in a location and in a manner to avoid damage to theB.components. Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise particular care to avoid damage tofinishes of metals.

PROJECT CONDITIONS1.5

Field Measurements: Verify interior aluminum frame dimensions by field measurementsA.before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabricationschedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1

Provide interior aluminum frames by one of the following:A.

Wilson Partitions; Vernon, CA.1.Frameworks; Houston, TX.2.Western Integrated Materials, Inc.; Long Beach, CA.3.ALTech System products by the Custom Components Co. Inc.; Tampa, FL.4.

MATERIALS2.2

Fabricate interior aluminum frame components from aluminum extrusions complying withA.ASTM B 221, "Anodizing Quality" and formed to the sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated;temper required to suit structural and finish requirements.

ACCESSORIES2.3

Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel or zinc plated steel complying with ASTMA.A 164.

Door Silencers (Mutes): Manufacturer's standard gray mohair.B.

Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded gray plastic or EPDM, toC.accommodate 1/4 inch- thick glass at 4 side supported framing; unless otherwise indicated.

Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."D.

Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."E.

INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMESCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 12 16 - 2

Page 112: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SEALING MATERIALS2.4

Exposed Sealing Materials: Acrylic latex type sealants, exposed at perimeter joints in contactA.with adjacent wallboard materials are specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

FABRICATION2.5

General: Fabricate the interior aluminum frames to the designs, shapes, and sizes shown usingA.the materials specified and shown to produce assemblies which meet or exceed the performancerequirements. To the greatest extent possible complete fabrication, assembly, finishing,hardware applications and other work before shipment to Project site.

Metal Wall Thickness: Provide shapes as shown and as required to suit the performance1.requirements but with wall thickness of not less than the following for each majorcomponent:

Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick, reinforced fora.hinges and strikes.Glass Frames: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick, designed forb.glass thickness indicated.Ceiling Tracks: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick.c.Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.050 inch thick, removable snap-in glassd.stops and door stops without exposed fasteners.Frame Face Dimension: 1-1/2 inches, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.e.

Glazing shall be performed in accordance with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."2.

Provide continuous glazing stops with concealed fasteners for all frames. Provide stops withB.hairline joints at corners. Provide stops with square, not beveled, shouldered profile unlessotherwise shown.

Cut, reinforce, drill and tap frames in strict accordance with the printed door hardwareC.manufacturers templates and instructions. Provide solid steel hardware reinforcements,securely fastened to frames where door hardware is to be attached.

Joints in Metal Work: All exposed work shall be carefully fitted and matched to produceD.continuity of line and design, with all joints, being accurately fitted for hairline contact andrigidly secured.

Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for precise butt or mitered1.connections.Fabricate frames for glass to allow glass replacement without dismantling door or frame.2.Fabricate all components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.3.

Shop Assembly: As far as practicable, all fitting and assembly work shall be done in aE.fabrication shop.

INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMESCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 12 16 - 3

Page 113: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

ALUMINUM FINISHES2.6

General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and MetalA.Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

Finish Application: Apply coatings to all exposed surfaces of interior aluminum frame work.B.

Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the AluminumC.Association for designating aluminum finishes.

Protective and Decorative, Finishes: Complying with the following:D.

Metal Preparation and Pretreatment: Remove die markings prior to finishing operations.1.Perform this work in addition to the finish specified. Scratches, abrasions, dents andsimilar defects are unacceptable.Colors:2.

Painted Finish: Factory applied baked enamel or powder coating complying witha.AAMA 2603, AAMA 2604, in manufacturer's standard color as selected byArchitect.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1

Coordinate interior aluminum door and frame work with the work of other Sections and provideA.items to be placed during the installation of other work at the proper time to avoid delays in theWork.

Place such items, including concealed overhead framing, accurately in relation to the finalB.location of interior aluminum door and frame components.

EXAMINATION3.2

Examine walls, floors, and ceilings for suitable conditions where interior aluminum doors andA.frames are to be installed.

Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size indicated.B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.C.

INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMESCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 12 16 - 4

Page 114: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

INSTALLATION3.3

Comply with interior aluminum door and frame manufacturer's written installation instructionsA.and the Architect reviewed shop drawings. Do not install damaged components. Fit framejoints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovementjoints.

Frame Installation: Install frames plumb and square, shimmed and then securely anchored toB.substrates with fasteners recommended by frame manufacturer.

Fasten to steel stud bulkhead framing using sheet metal screws or other fasteners1.approved by frame manufacturer in accordance with the accepted shop drawings.

Use concealed installation clips to ensure that splices and connections are tightlya.butted and properly aligned.Secure clips to main structural extrusion components and not to snap-in or trimb.members.Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation isc.complete.

Wood Door Installation: Refer to Section 08 14 16 "Flush Wood Doors."C.

Install glazing to comply with requirements of Section 08 80 00 "Glazing," unless otherwiseD.indicated.

Install acrylic latex perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Section 07 92 00 "JointE.Sealants," unless otherwise indicated.

CLEANING3.4

Clean exposed surfaces of interior aluminum doors and frames promptly after installation,A.using cleaning methods recommended by interior aluminum door and frame manufacturer.

Clean and maintain anodized aluminum according to AAMA 609.1.

PROTECTION3.5

Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period toA.ensure that interior aluminum doors and frames work will be without damage or deterioration,at time of acceptance.

END OF SECTION 08 12 16

INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMESCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 12 16 - 5

Page 115: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes solid core flush wood doors.A.

The integration of a security system into the flush wood door work is required. The1.Contractor shall be responsible for the total and complete coordination of the securitysystem components into the Work.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.2

Product Data: Submit product data for each type of door required. Include factory-finishingA.specifications.

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location, size, thickness, and hand of eachB.door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in the product data;location and extent of hardware blocking; undercuts, special beveling, and other pertinent data.

Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware of factory1.machined doors.Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.2.Indicate fire label requirements including fire rating time duration, maximum temperature3.rise requirements, and smoke label requirements.Indicate routing of electrical conduit and dimensions and locations of cutouts in wood4.doors to accept electric hardware devices.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.3

Quality Standard: Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of AWI'sA."Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, 8th Edition, Version 2.0, Section 1300"where standards and specifications conflict the more stringent shall be required.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.4

Protect wood doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, andA.deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's writteninstructions.

Package doors individually in heavy duty cardboard cartons or poly bags.B.

FLUSH WOOD DOORSCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 14 16 - 1

Page 116: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Handle wood doors with clean gloves. Lift and carry wood doors when moving them aroundC.the site, do not drag wood doors across one another.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.5

Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until wet work , such as masonry,A.concrete, stone, tile, terrazzo, plastering, wallboard joint treatment, is complete and dried, andHVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancylevels during the remainder of the construction period. Do not expose doors to sudden changesin temperature such as forced heat used to dry out the site.

WARRANTY1.6

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, andA.Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective inmaterials or workmanship for the life of the original installation of the door. A representativeof the door manufacturer shall inspect the installed doors and shall note on the warranty that noprovisions of the warranty have been nullified in the manufacture and/or installation.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance to requirements, provide products by one of theA.following:

Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. www.algomahardwoods.com1.Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division. www.eggersindustries.com2.Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. www.marshfielddoors.com3.VT Industries. www.vtindustries.com4.

DOOR CONSTRUCTION2.2

Doors for Opaque Finish:A.

Grade: Custom.1.Face Veneer: Medium-density overlay.2.Thickness: 1-3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated.3.Materials:4.

Particleboard Core Material: Complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-LD-1 ora.1-LD-2.

FLUSH WOOD DOORSCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 14 16 - 2

Page 117: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Blocking: 5-1/2 inch wide minimum top-rail blocking at doors with closers andb.bottom rail blocking at doors with kickplates consisting of minimum 1/2 inch widesingle length structural composite lumber (SCL) outer band and single length SCLinner band.Vertical Edges: 1-3/8 inch wide minimum prior to fitting, 2 ply laminated woodc.construction consisting of a single piece hardwood outer band, without fingerjoints,and an inner band of SCL. Trim non-rated door width equally on both jamb edges.Crossbanding: Minimum 1/16 inch thick, low density hardwood, composite, ord.HDH (high density hardboard).

Construction: AWI Section 1300, PC-5 CE. Stiles, rails, and blocking bonded to core5.then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. Crossbanding materials shall extendfull width of door with grain running horizontally, tapeless spliced without voids or showthrough (telegraphing), and directly glued to core and blocking. Sand crossbandingbefore application of face veneer. Face veneer shall extend full height of door with grainrunning vertically, tapeless spliced without voids or show through (telegraphing), anddirectly glued to cross band. Glue lines between face veneer, crossbanding, and blockingshall be of a type to comply with the specified warranty using the hot plate process.

FABRICATION2.3

Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.A.

Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated.B.

Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply1.with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to complyC.with DHI-WDHS-3 unless otherwise indicated to match existing frame hardware preparations.Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, AWI Section 1300-G-20,BHMA A156.115-W standards, and hardware templates.

Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in frames to verify dimensions and1.alignment before factory machining.

Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements ofD.referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. Install light beads with fasteners spacedfor opening size and fire rating indicated. Install wood bead moldings with finish nails andcountersink without striking bead. Fill countersunk heads with putty matching wood beadcolor.

SHOP PRIMING2.4

Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces and edges of doors, including cutouts, with oneA.coat of wood primer/sealer as standard with door manufacturer. Surfaces shall be clean and drybefore priming. Apply primer/sealer uniformly without bare spots, runs, or sags.

FLUSH WOOD DOORSCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 14 16 - 3

Page 118: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Hardware: Apply hardware to new doors in accordance with hardware manufacturer'sA.instructions and Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware." For particleboard core doors drill pilotholes of proper size for installing hinge screws. Adjust hardware items just prior to finalinspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.

Factory wrapping shall be maintained on new doors during construction period, and all1.hardware shall be installed by cutting the factory wrapping at the mounting location ofthe hardware item.

General Door Installation Standards: Install doors in locations indicated to comply withB.manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. Wherestandards conflict the more stringent shall apply.

Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; and toC.contact stops uniformly, do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer orpermitted for fire-rated doors. Field cutting, fitting or trimming, shall be executed in aworkmanlike manner. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut and trimmed surfacesimmediately after fitting and machining using clear varnish or sealer.

Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/81.inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where thresholdis shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold.Comply with fire label requirements for fire-rated doors.2.

Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge, matching clearancesD.specified for factory prefitting, and to contact stops uniformly. Field cutting, fitting ortrimming, if required, shall be executed in a workmanlike manner.

Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/81.inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where thresholdis shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold.

Existing Wood Doors (Salvaged from Alteration Work): Install salvaged existing wood doorsE.in locations indicated. Field cutting, fitting or trimming, if required, shall be executed in aworkmanlike manner.

Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required atF.Project site.

Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements:G.

Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."1.

FLUSH WOOD DOORSCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 14 16 - 4

Page 119: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION3.2

Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.A.

Protection: Protect wood doors to ensure that the wood door work will be without damage orB.deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

Refinish or replace wood doors damaged during installation. Replace any new wood1.doors that are warped, twisted, demonstrate core show through, are not true in plane, orcannot be refinished to the satisfaction of the Architect.

END OF SECTION 08 14 16

FLUSH WOOD DOORSCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 14 16 - 5

Page 120: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 08 41 26 - ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes all-glass entrance and storefront systems.A.

Security system components may be incorporated into the door and frame openings of all1.glass entrances and storefronts at the Owner's option. Cooperate with the Owner'ssecurity system contractors if the Owner chooses to incorporate security systemcomponents during the course of the Work.Single Subcontract Responsibilities: Refer to Section 08 44 13 "Glazed Aluminum2.Curtain Walls" for the requirements of single subcontract responsibilities for all glassentrances and storefronts.

Section includes all-glass entrance and storefront systems. The all glass entrance and storefrontB.work includes the following:

All glass swing entrance doors and framing, including hardware, stripping and thresholds.1.All glass sliding entrance doors, and framing, including hardware, stripping and2.thresholds.Metal trim, flashings, and similar items in conjunction with all glass entrance and3.storefronts.Sealants, joint fillers, and gasketing systems for all glass entrances and storefronts.4.Anchors, shims, fasteners, inserts, expansion devices, accessories, support brackets and5.attachments for all glass entrances and storefronts.Glass and glazing for all glass entrances and storefronts.6.Security system components may be incorporated into the door and frame openings of all7.glass entrance and storefront work at the Owner's option. Cooperate with the Owner'ssecurity system contractors if the Owner chooses to incorporate security systemcomponents during the course of the Work.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.2

General: Refer to Section 08 44 13 "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls."A.

General: Comply with the applicable provisions of AAMA "Curtain Wall Manual #10" for theB.care and handling of all glass entrance and storefront work from shop to site.

Packaging of components shall be so selected to protect the components from damage duringC.shipping and handling.

Storage on Site:D.

ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 41 26 - 1

Page 121: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Store all glass entrance and storefront components in a location and in a manner to avoid1.damage to the components. Stacking shall be done in a way which will prevent bending,excessive pressure, abrasion or other permanent damage of the component and itsfinished surfaces.Store all glass entrance and storefront components and materials in a clean, dry location,2.away from uncured concrete and other construction activities. Cover with non-stainingwaterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting in a manner that will permitcirculation of air inside the covering.

Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise particular care to avoid damage to finishes ofE.metals.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.3

Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of supporting structure by field measurements beforeA.fabrication so that the entrance and storefront work will be accurately designed, fabricated andfitted to the structure. Indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabricationschedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Use Contractor's lines andbenchmarks as a basis for measurements.

Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying1.the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating entrance and storefrontwork without field measurements. Coordinate supporting structure construction to ensurethat actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

WARRANTY1.4

General: Refer to Section 08 44 13 "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls."A.

Special Warranty: Submit a 2 year written warranty, beginning from date of substantialB.completion, and executed by the Contractor, manufacturer and the all glass entrance andstorefront installer agreeing to repair or replace components of entrance and storefront systemsthat develop defects in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Defectsinclude, structural failures, sealant failures, deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and othermaterials beyond normal weathering, failure of operating components to function properly,uncontrolled water leakage, uncontrolled air leakage, and any other evidence of failure ordeterioration of the all glass entrance and storefront work to meet performance requirements.

Warranty; Anodized Coatings: Submit a warranty for a period of 3 years, warranting that theC.anodized aluminum will not develop excessive fading or excessive non-uniformity of color orshade, and will not crack, peel, pit, or corrode; all within the limits defined as follows:

"Excessive Fading" means a change in appearance which is perceptible and objectionable1.as determined by the Architect when viewed visually in comparison with the originalcolor range samples.

ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 41 26 - 2

Page 122: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

"Excessive Non-Uniformity" means non-uniform fading during the period of the2.warranty to the extent that adjacent panels have a color difference greater than theoriginal acceptable range of color."Will Not Pit or Otherwise Corrode" means there shall be no pitting or other type of3.corrosion discernable from a distance of 10 feet resulting from the natural elements in theatmosphere at the project site.

Warranty, High Performance Organic Coatings: Submit a warranty for a period of 20 years,D.warranting the integrity of film and permanence of color of the high performance organiccoatings for the following:

Color fade not to exceed 5 delta E units (Hunter) as calculated in accordance with ASTM1.D 2244 on exposed surfaces cleaned with clean water and a soft cloth.Degree of chalking not to exceed rating No. 8 when measured in accordance with ASTM2.D 4214 on exposed unwashed surfaces.Will not crack, check or peel.3.

Warranty, Thermosetting Acrylic Enamel Coatings: Submit a warranty for a period of 5 years,E.warranting the integrity of film against cracking, chipping, flaking, peeling and blistering of thethermosetting acrylic enamel coatings.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1

Coordinate all-glass entrance and storefront work with the work of other Sections and provideA.items to be placed during the installation of other work at the proper time to avoid delays in thework.

Place such items, including concealed overhead framing, accurately in relation to the finalB.location of the all-glass entrance and storefront components.

EXAMINATION3.2

Examine the substrates, adjoining construction, and conditions under which the Work is to beA.installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 41 26 - 3

Page 123: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Before beginning installation of the entrance and storefront work examine all parts of the1.existing building structural frame and the existing building cladding indicated to supportthe entrance and storefront work. [Ensure that the existing swing door thresholds,existing swing doors, swing door framing and subframes have been completelyremoved with all projecting anchors cut off flush. ]Notify Contractor in writing, ofany dimensions, or conditions, found which will prevent the proper execution of theentrance and storefront work, including specified tolerances. Use Contractor's offsetlines and bench marks as basis of measurements.

INSTALLATION3.3

General: Refer to Section 08 44 13 "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls."A.

General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, andB.installing all-glass entrance and storefront systems. Do not install damaged components. Fitframe joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly securenonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.

Cut and trim component parts of the all-glass entrance and storefront work during1.erection only with the approval of the manufacturer or fabricator, and in accordance withhis recommendations. Restore finish completely to protect material and remove allevidence of cutting and trimming. Remove and replace members where cutting andtrimming has impaired strength or appearance, as directed by Architect.Set components within the erection tolerances with uniform joints where shown. Place2.components on aluminum or stainless steel shims and fasten to supporting substratesusing bolts and similar fasteners.Do not erect components which are warped, deformed, bowed, defaced or otherwise3.damaged as to impair strength. Remove and replace members damaged in the process oferection.No holes or slots shall be burned, cut into, or field drilled in any building framing4.member without the written acceptance of the structural engineer.Coat concealed surfaces of dissimilar materials, and any ferrous metal components, with5.a heavy coating of bituminous paint, zinc rich primer or other separation in accordancewith manufacturer's recommendations. Where aluminum components, if any, willcontact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces withbituminous paint.

Entrance Doors: Doors shall be securely anchored in place to a straight, plumb and levelC.condition, without distortion. Adjust doors to provide a tight fit at contact points forweathertight closure and to operate smoothly, without binding, with hardware functioningproperly. Weatherstripping contact, and hardware movement, shall be field tested and finaladjustment, and lubrication, made for proper operation and performance of doors.

ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 41 26 - 4

Page 124: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Entrance Doors: Doors shall be securely anchored in place to a straight, plumb and levelD.condition, without distortion. Adjust doors to operate smoothly, without binding, withhardware functioning properly. Weatherstripping contact, and hardware movement, shall befield tested and final adjustment, and lubrication, made for proper operation and performance ofdoors.

Door Hardware: Refer to Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."1.Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions using2.concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate indicated.3.Set sill members in a bed of polyurethane sealant to provide weathertight construction.4.Comply with requirements of Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.E.

Install silicone glazing sealant to comply with requirements of Section 08 80 00 "Glazing,"F.unless otherwise indicated.

Install vinyl wiper blade strips, in one continuous length, at each glass to glass panel verticalG.joint.

ERECTION TOLERANCES3.4

The all-glass entrance and storefront systems shall be fabricated and erected to accommodateA.the dimensional tolerances of the structural frame and surrounding cladding, while providingthe following as installed tolerances.

Variation from theoretical calculated position as located in plan or elevation in relation to1.established floors lines, column lines and other fixed elements of the structure, includingvariations from plumb, level, straight and member size: +/- 1/4 inch max. in any 20 footrun, column-to-column bay, or floor-to-floor height.Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.2.Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.Variation from angle, or plumb, shown: +/- 1/8 inch max. in any 10 foot run or story3.height, non-cumulative.Variation from slope, or level, shown: +/- 1/8 inch max. in any 10 foot run or4.column-to-column bay, non-cumulative.

ANCHORAGE3.5

Anchorage of the all-glass entrance and storefront work to the structure and surroundingA.cladding shall be in accordance with the accepted shop drawings.

ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 41 26 - 5

Page 125: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

WELDING3.6

Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer of material being welded,A.and in accordance with AWS D1.1 for concealed steel members. Use only methods which willavoid distortion, and discoloration, of exposed faces.

Welds and adjacent metal areas shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with a single coat ofB.bituminous paint.

REMOVAL OF DEBRIS3.7

All debris caused by, or incidental to, the erection of the all-glass entrance and storefront workA.shall be removed from the site and disposed of legally.

CLEANING3.8

Clean metal surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to factoryA.finished exposed surfaces.

Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections thatB.establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances.

Immediately remove any deleterious material from surfaces of aluminum.C.

PROTECTION3.9

Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period toA.ensure that all-glass entrance and storefront work will be without damage or deterioration, otherthan normal weathering, at time of acceptance.

END OF SECTION 08 41 26

ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTSCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 41 26 - 6

Page 126: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes door hardware.A.

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS1.2

Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in SectionA.01 00 00 "General Requirements." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keyingschedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, thefollowing:

Preliminary key system schematic diagram.1.Address for delivery of keys.2.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: Submit product data including installation details, material descriptions,A.dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

Door Hardware Schedule: Submit door hardware schedule prepared by or under theB.supervision of door hardware supplier. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule withdoors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish ofdoor hardware. The Architect's review of schedule shall neither be construed as a completecheck nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors, deviations, or omissionsfrom the specified requirements to provide complete door hardware for the project.

Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating1.complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.

Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule anda.in 'Vertical Format'.

Content: Include the following information:2.

Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.a.Manufacturer of each item.b.Fastenings and other pertinent information.c.Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floord.plans and in door and frame schedule.Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.e.

DOOR HARDWARECopyright 2017 Gensler

08 71 00 - 1

Page 127: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Mounting locations for door hardware. Supply templates to door and framef.manufacturer(s) to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts forhardware. Detail conditions requiring custom extended lip strikes, or other specialor custom conditions.Door and frame sizes and materials.g.

Keying Schedule: Submit keying schedule prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,C.detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram andindex each key set to unique door designations.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.4

Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of door hardware. Include finalA.hardware and keying schedule.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.5

Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar inA.material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted inconstruction with a record of successful in-service performance.

Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier, who has completed a minimum of three (3)B.projects over the last 5 years which were similar in material, design and extent to that indicatedfor the Project - as determined by the Architect - and which have resulted in construction with arecord of successful in service performance, and who is or employs a qualified ArchitecturalHardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor,Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by theC.Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experiencedin providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material,design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unlessD.otherwise indicated.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:E.

Provide hardware items complying with the applicable provisions for accessibility and1.usability by the disabled and handicapped in compliance with Americans withDisabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities(ADAAG)".NFPA 101: Comply with applicable provisions for means of egress doors.2.

DOOR HARDWARECopyright 2017 Gensler

08 71 00 - 2

Page 128: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.6

Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered toA.Project site. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final DoorHardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

COORDINATION1.7

Templates: Furnish templates and door hardware schedules, coordinated for the application ofA.door hardware items with door and frame details, to door opening fabricators and tradesperforming door opening work to permit the preparation of doors and frames to receive thespecified door hardware. Where the door hardware item scheduled is not adaptable to thefinished size of door opening members requiring door hardware, submit an item having asimilar operation and quality to the Architect for review. Each door hardware item shall befabricated to templates.

Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existingB.construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existingconditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and toprovide proper door operation.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE2.1

General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section,A.door hardware sets are keyed to each scheduled door in the door and frame schedule, and theDoor Hardware Schedule.

Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named1.manufacturer's products.The hardware supplier shall review each hardware set and compare it with the door types,2.details, and sizes as shown and verify each hardware item for function, hand, backset,and method of fastening through shop drawing submittals.

DOOR HARDWARECopyright 2017 Gensler

08 71 00 - 3

Page 129: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

LOCKS AND LATCHES2.2

Mortise Lock and Latch Sets: Heavy duty, commercial, mortise bodies complying with BHMAA.A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1, with throughbolted lever trim. Furnish mortise type, fieldreversible without disassembly, field multifunctional without opening lock cases, lock and latchsets with 1 or 2 piece anti-friction deadlocking stainless steel latchbolts having a minimum 3/4inch throw, 2-3/4 inches backset, and UL listed for 3 hour doors. All lock and latch sets, to befurnished complete with heavy 0.109 inch (12 gage)wrought steel zinc dichromate or chromeplated case, trim, adjustable beveled square cornered armored fronts, cold forged steel orstainless steel hubs, and 6 pin cylinders. Conceal fastenings, washers and bushings. Providewrought, or black plastic, box strikes for each lock and latch set. Provide brass, bronze orstainless steel strikes with curved lips of sufficient length to protect frames. Provide solidforged or cast levers with wrought roses. Where lock functions are scheduled providenon-handed guard bolt and stainless steel deadbolt with a minimum 1 inch throw.

Schlage L9000 Series, 02 Design x A Rose x 09-905 Turnlever; Schlage Lock CompanyB.(SCH). Provide handed ANSI 4-7/8 inch curved lip strikes die punched to match boltsprovided with latchset functions only (Part No. XL11-820/XL11-821), provide non-handedstandard curve lip strikes for all other functions 10-072. Where electro-mechanical locksets arescheduled provide L9000EL Series with trim matching mechanical locksets.

CYLINDERS AND KEYING2.3

Cores for Bored Cylindrical Locksets: Provide key-in lever 6 pin cores for all bored cylindricalA.locksets, keyed into building system, as manufactured by the bored lockset manufacturer.

Strikes for Locks and Latches: All strikes for locks and latches shall be provided by the lockB.and latch manufacturer unless otherwise specified or scheduled, refer to Article "Locks andLatches."DP2; Ives.

OPERATING TRIM (PUSHES AND PULLS)2.4

Type 1: Full mortised, solid, bronze or brass door edge pull, with 1/2 inch finger clearance,A.having nominal overall dimensions of 4 inches long by 2.56 inches overall, with minimum11/16 inch backbend drilled and countersunk to receive 2 screw fastener; form for full mortiseapplication with lockedge face shaped for square or bevel cut edge as indicated; finish asscheduled.

SRO Style Edge Pull; Tydix (TY).1.

Type 2: Fabricate straight push pulls for back to back mounting from 1 inch diameter2.5stainless steel bar stock in finish as scheduled. Custom fabricate pulls with minimum2-1/2 inch projection, minimum 1-1/2 inch clearance, 10 inch center to center of bases with

DOOR HARDWARECopyright 2017 Gensler

08 71 00 - 4

Page 130: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

center line of pull centered on door stiles. Furnish spanner turning washer and studassemblies threaded to accept concealed throughbolt attachment including provision forspanner tightening of bolts of push/pull assembly. Do not provide baseplates at stile to pullinterface. Provide one of the following:CLOSERS

Surface-Mounted Closers Without Track Arms: Closers shall be certified by ETL laboratoriesA.and the manufacturer to a minimum of 8,000,000 cycles and meet BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.Closers used in conjunction with overhead stops and holders shall be templated and coordinatedto function properly. Properly detail closers to meet application requirements by providingdrop plates, brackets, etc. to meet application and installation requirements as indicated.Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for size of door closer depending on size ofdoor, stack pressure conditions, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Closersshall have adjustable spring power, full rack and pinion, independent closing speed and latchregulating V-slotted valves, fully hydraulic with a high strength cast iron cylinder and solidforged steel arms, bore diameter of 1-1/2 inches, pinion shaft diameter of 5/8 inches, adjustableback check, cushion and built-in stop feature where scheduled, hold open arms wherescheduled, delayed action where scheduled, arm finish to match closer cover finish scheduled.Provide metal covers of clean line design with plated or primed for paint finish as scheduledand that require removal in order to make adjustments to closer.

STOPS AND HOLDERS2.6

Roller Latch Angle Stops: Special angle stop BHMA A156.16 Type E19111, fabricated fromA.brass or bronze, for single doors without stops and having a minimum of two rubber silencersper stop, minimum 1-1/2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches long base for mortising into the head ofdoor frame, 9/16 inch maximum stop face projection, adjustable roller latch and ramp rollerstrike; finish as scheduled.

Exposed Overhead Door Holders: Medium duty, surface mounted, bronze bodied, slide trackB.design, with heavy shock absorber spring providing 5 to 7 degree compression before deadstop,non-metal slide and shock blocks, 110 degree maximum opening, complying with BHMAA156.8 Type C15511 for hold open and Type C15541 for stop function. Provide stop, or holdopen, functions as scheduled.

Floor Stops: Cast half dome design with rubber bumper, finish as scheduled. ProvideC.manufacturer's standard riser heights as required for carpeted areas in conjunction with the floorbumpers scheduled. Unless otherwise scheduled, provide floor stops at each door leaf wherepartition construction does not allow the door to swing greater than 90 degrees.

For Thresholds, Carpet and/or Undercut Doors: Comply with BHMA 156.16 Type1.L12161, L02161 or L12141.

For Doors with Standard 3/8 inch Clearance: Comply with BHMA 156.16 Type L12161,2.L02141 or L12141.

DOOR HARDWARECopyright 2017 Gensler

08 71 00 - 5

Page 131: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Type L03011; grey rubber, minimumD.diameter 1/2 inch; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame, specifically designed to forman air pocket to absorb shock and reduce noise of door closing. Provide two silencers for eachpair of doors, three silencers for each single door.

Silencers for Aluminum Door Frames: Refer to Section 08 12 16 "Interior AluminumE.Frames."

FABRICATION2.7

Manufacturer's Nameplate: Provide each door hardware item without exposed manufacturers'A.labels, names, or designs.

Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generallyB.prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according tocommercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillipsoval-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware item being attached.Machine screws and expansion shields shall be used for attaching hardware to concrete andmasonry. Use throughbolts for renovation work only where existing door blocking andreinforcements are unknown.

Concealed Fasteners: All new doors and door frames have been specified with adequate1.blocking and reinforcement provisions to eliminate exposed throughbolting of hardwareitems. Doors installed with exposed throughbolts will be rejected and replaced by theContractor at no cost to the Owner. Where through bolts are used on existing doorsprovide sleeves for each through bolt.

FINISHES2.8

Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18.A.BHMA 626 (US26D): Satin chromium plated.BHMA 630 (US32D): Satin stainless steel.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at the following heights, unless specificallyA.indicated on the Drawings or required to comply with governing regulations:

Door Pulls: 44 inches from finish floor to center of grip. Pull bases centered on door stiles,unless otherwise indicated.

Push Plates: 44 inches from finish floor to center of plate. Coordinate with pull location.

DOOR HARDWARECopyright 2017 Gensler

08 71 00 - 6

Page 132: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Butt Hinges: 10 inches to bottom of lowest hinge from finish floor; 5 inches to top of upperhinge from top of door; space intermediate hinges equally between lower and upperhinges.

Flush Bolt Operating Mechanisms: Top bolt 66 to 72 inches from finish floor, bottom bolt 12inches from finish floor.

Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. InstallB.overhead surface closers for maximum degree of opening obtainable. Place on room side ofcorridor doors, stair side of stair doors, secondary corridor side of doors between corridors.Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that arelater to be finished, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trimunits with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounteditems until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

Do not install permanent key cylinders in locks until the time of preliminary acceptance by theC.Owner. At the time of preliminary acceptance, and in the presence of the Owner'srepresentative, permanent key all lock cylinders. Record and file all keys in the key controlsystem specified, and turn system over to Owner for sole possession and control.

ADJUSTING3.2

Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure properA.operation or function of every hardware component. Replace hardware components that cannotbe adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for buildingstack pressures, final operation of forced air mechanical equipment and to comply withreferenced accessibility requirements.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.3

Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. Clean hardware components asA.necessary to restore proper finish. Provide protection during the progress of the work andmaintain conditions that ensure door hardware is in perfect working order and without damageor deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE - REFER TO DRAWINGS3.4A.

END OF SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARECopyright 2017 Gensler

08 71 00 - 7

Page 133: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specifiedA.in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

Windows.1.Doors.2.Glazed curtain walls.3.Glazed entrances.4.Interior borrowed lites.5.Storefront framing.6.

Related Requirements:B.

Refer to Section 08 41 26 "All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts" for requirements1.applicable to single subcontract responsibility for glazing.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.2

Product Data: Submit product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated.A.

Sustainable Design Submittals: Submit the following in compliance with Section 01 81 13B."Sustainable Design Requirements":

Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.1.

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS1.3

Deliver in manufacturer's containers suitable for storing, clearly labeled as to type, size, andA.thickness. Include manufacturer's instructions for care and storage of glass. Store on thepremises where directed.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4

Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar inA.material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted inconstruction with a record of successful in-service performance.

GLAZINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 80 00 - 1

Page 134: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Source Limitations for Glass and Glazing Accessories: Obtain glass and glazing accessoriesB.from one source for each product indicated below:

Heat-treated glass, including heat-strengthened, tempered, and heat-soaked glass.1.

Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeledC.by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratingsindicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed andD.labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fireratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.

Safety Glass: Comply with the applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances andE.regulations of Federal and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Wherever requirementsconflict, the more stringent shall be required. Obtain approvals from all such authorities. As aminimum, provide Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201(Consumer Product Safety Commission "Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials,"as published in the Code of Federal Regulations) and ANSI Z97.1.

Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with1.certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agencyacceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Locate permanent markings in one corner,and in the same location, of each glass lite in accordance with the requirements of theSGCC labeling guidelines. Markings shall have a nominal size of no greater than 1-inchin diameter, and be located with glass edge clearances, at the corner, by not more than3/4-inch up and 3/4-inch over.

Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass productF.manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or inreferenced standards.

GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide."1.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5

Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed toA.prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, directexposure to sun, or other causes.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.6

Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrateA.temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers andwhen glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

GLAZINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 80 00 - 2

Page 135: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

WARRANTY1.7

Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Ceramic Frit-Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty,A.made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacementsfor those coated-glass units whose coatings flake, peel, or crack within the specified warrantyperiod indicated below. Upon notification of such deterioration within the warranty period,furnish replacement glass units for those glass units whose coatings have flaked, peeled orcracked at the convenience of the Owner.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.1.

Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Written warranty, made out to OwnerB.and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements forlaminated-glass units that develop edge separation, delamination materially obstructing visionthrough glass, and blemishes exceeding those specified within the warranty period indicatedbelow. Upon notification of such deterioration within the warranty period, furnish replacementglass units for those glass units having edge separation, delamination, and blemishes at theconvenience of the Owner.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.1.

Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to OwnerC.and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements forinsulating-glass units whose hermetic seal has failed within specified warranty period indicatedbelow. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interiorsurfaces of glass. Upon notification of such deterioration within the warranty period, furnishreplacement glass units for failed glass units at the convenience of the Owner.

Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.1.

Heat-Soaked Tempered Glass Special Warranty: Executed by the Contractor, manufacturer andD.the glass installer agreeing to replace glass units that spontaneously break as a result of NickelSulfide (NiS) inclusions within the specified warranty period without material or labor chargesto the Owner.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.1.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS2.1

General: Heat-treat glass where the need is determined by thermal stress analyses, by windA.load analyses, and where required to meet safety glazing requirements.

GLAZINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 80 00 - 3

Page 136: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Fully Tempered Glass: Provide glass complying with ASTM C 1048 Kind FT and meeting theB.requirements of ANSI Z97.1. Surface compression shall be equal to or greater than 10,000 psi.After tempering, heat-soak 100 percent of all fabricated glass units to European Union StandardEN14179 to reduce the potential for inclusion related glass breakage. Statistical heat soakingshall not be permitted.

The appearance of anisotropy, also known as 'leopard spots' ••and 'quench patterns', is1.known to be associated with toughened (tempered) glass under certain polarized lightingconditions. This will not be considered a fault unless it is visible in a range of reasonablytypical naturally occurring conditions. The Architect will determine the acceptablerange(s) of anisotropy from glass sample submittals. Coatings applied to tempered glassproducts shall not exacerbate anisotropy to an unacceptable range(s).Tempered Glass Quality Imperfection Limitations: In addition to the limitations included2.under ASTM C 1048, all glass shall be supplied meeting the following quality standards:

Chill cracks, roller marks, and picture framing shall not be permitted.a.Tracking/cloud and heat dimples shall be rejected if detectable at 10 feet.b.

FIRE-RATED GLAZING PRODUCTS2.2

Laminated Ceramic Glazing Material: Two lites of clear ceramic glazing material laminatedA.together to produce a laminated lite of minimum 5/16 inch nominal thickness; polished on bothsurfaces; weighing 4 lb/sq. ft.; and as follows:

Fire-Protection Rating: As indicated for the assembly in which the glazing material is1.installed, and permanently labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.Polished on both surfaces, transparent.2.Product: Provide one of the following:3.

"FireLite Plus"; Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. and distributed by Technical Glassa.Products.Pyran Platinum L; SaftiFirst div. of O'Keeffe's, Inc.b.Keralite FR-L; Vetrotech.c.

GLAZING SEALANTS2.3

General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:A.

Gasket, Blocking, and Spacer Wet Glazing Materials: Silicone, compatible with and adherent toB.each material it will be in contact with, as recommended by the manufacturer to fulfillperformance requirements.

Structural and Butt Glazing Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," ArticleC."Elastomeric Joint Sealants," subparagraph "Structural Glazing."

GLAZINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 80 00 - 4

Page 137: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Glazing Sealant for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test assemblyD.to obtain fire-protection rating.

GLAZING GASKETS2.4

Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into framesA.with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.

MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS2.5

General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazingA.standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for applicationindicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces, and wet glazing materials,contacted in installation.

Setting Blocks: EPDM complying with ASTM C 864 (Option II), blocks, 85 +/- 5 Shore AB.durometer hardness, 1/16 inch less than the channel width, and length based on the face area ofthe glass unit to be supported in accordance with GANA standards and glass manufacturerrecommendations, but not less than 4 inches.

Setting Blocks: Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115 (Type C), blocks, 85 +/- 5 Shore AC.durometer hardness, 1/16 inch less than the channel width, and length based on the face area ofthe glass unit to be supported in accordance with GANA standards and glass manufacturerrecommendations, but not less than 4 inches.

FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS2.6

Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated forA.Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying withwritten instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply withsystem performance requirements.

Edge and Surface Conditions: Comply with the recommendations of AAMA "Structural1.Properties of Glass" for "clean-cut" edges, except comply with manufacturer'srecommendations when they are at variance therewith.Exposed Glass Edges and Surface Condition: All edges shall be flat with an arrissed2.edge profile (small bevel of uniform width not exceeding 1/16 inch at an angle ofapproximately 45 degrees to the surface of the glass) with a polished (surface is reflectivein appearance similar to the major surface of the glass) surface.

GLAZINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 80 00 - 5

Page 138: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine glass framing, with glazier and glass framing erector present, for compliance with theA.following:

Compliance with the specified manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those1.for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.Presence and functioning of weep system.2.Minimum required face or edge clearances.3.Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.4.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

PREPARATION3.2

Clean glazing stops, glazing channels, and rabbets which will be in contact with the glazingA.materials immediately before glazing. Loose particles present or resulting from fabrication andcleaning shall be removed by blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air, or by vacuumingjoints. Remove protective coatings, oils from cutting and drilling operations, and residue onmetallic surfaces with solvents that leave no residue. Do not allow solvent to air dry withoutwiping. Use only lint-free towels for wiping of surfaces. Wipe metal surfaces with IPA(isopropyl alcohol) unless otherwise required by compatibility and adhesion testing results.

Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds. When priming, comply with wet glazing1.manufacturer's recommendations.

Inspect each glass unit immediately before installation. Do not install any units which areB.improperly sized or have damaged edges, scratches or abrasion or other evidence of damage.Remove labels from glass immediately after installation.

Seal vent (breather or capillary) tubes in insulating glass units in accordance with the insulatingC.glass manufacturer's written recommendations.

GLAZING, GENERAL3.3

Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, andA.other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those inreferenced glazing publications.

All glass units shall be installed in accordance with the glass manufacturer's1.recommendations.

GLAZINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 80 00 - 6

Page 139: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Unitized Shop-Glazed Structural Silicone Window and Curtain Wall Systems:a.Comply with the recommendations of the structural silicone and curtain wallframing manufacturers; where conflicts arise, the most stringent shall apply.

Structurally seal glass unit to mullions with specified two-part structural1)silicone sealant. Place and tool structural silicone beads to remove airpockets and bubbles; remove excess structural silicone from glass and metalsubstrates. Insert and shape weatherseal joint backer rods, or gaskets, intovoid between glass units and between glass units and framing to the properdepth to receive silicone weatherseal sealant. Place silicone weathersealsealant into void and tool flush with adjacent exterior glass lite faces;remove excess sealant from glass and metal substrates.

Field Glazed Structural Silicone Window and Curtain Wall Units: Set full heightb.continuous structural gaskets/spacers to vertical mullions. Set glass units with voidbetween edge of units and head/sill channel, but with units fully within head/sillrebate so as to provide a proper bite. Align glass unit edges over vertical mullioncontinuous structural gasket/spacers and secure with manufacturer's recommendedtemporary cleats. Structurally seal glass unit to vertical mullions with specifiedone-part structural silicone sealant. Tool structural silicone flush in alignment tomullion face and perpendicular to face of interior glass lite; remove excessstructural silicone from glass and metal substrates. After full cure of structuralsilicone sealant, remove temporary cleats. Any holes left in the vertical mullionswhich were caused by the temporary cleats shall be sealed immediately. Insert andshape weatherseal joint backer rods, or gaskets, into vertical void between glassunits and at a proper depth to receive silicone weatherseal sealant. Place siliconeweatherseal sealant into void and tool flush with adjacent exterior glass lite faces;remove excess sealant from glass and metal substrates.

Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,B.minimum edge and face clearances, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Projectconditions during installation.

Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glassC.from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edgedamage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performanceand appearance.

Apply primers to surfaces indicated to receive glazing materials. Use primers as determined byD.preconstruction compatibility and adhesion testing.

Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazingE.publications, unless more stringent requirements are recommended by glass manufacturer.Place blocks to allow water passage to weep holes. Set blocks in thin course of silicone sealant.

For Glass Units Less Than 72 inches: Locate setting blocks at sill one-quarter of the1.width in from each end of the glass, unless otherwise recommended by the glassmanufacturer.

GLAZINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 80 00 - 7

Page 140: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

For Glass Units 72 inchesor Greater: Locate setting blocks at sill one-eighth of the width2.in from each end of the glass, but not less than 6 inches, unless otherwise recommendedby the glass manufacturer.

Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.F.

Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows:G.

Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.1.Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets andglazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearancesand to comply with system performance requirements.Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant2.width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness oftape.

Provide edge blocking to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, sizedH.and located to comply with the glass manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements inreferenced glazing publications.

Edge blocking will not be required at structural glazed window and curtain walls unless1.specifically required by the glass manufacturer for the conditions shown.

Set glass lites with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics, producing theI.greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance on the entire exterior wall elevation.

Set glass units with void between edge of units and glazing channel.1.Shadow Box Enclosure Glazing: Remove any dirt, window and curtain wall debris, and2.construction debris, from interior portion of shadowbox enclosures. Where lubricants arerecommended for the installation of glazing gaskets, use types which will not releasevolatiles, or leave visible deposits or residues, on inside of spandrel glass units or metalback panels.Orient and install insulating glass units made up with one lite of low emissivity coated3.glass with the uncoated glass lite on the inboard (building) side.Orient and install insulating glass units made up with one lite of tinted glass with the4.untinted glass lite on the inboard (building) side.

Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize gasket onJ.opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation issubjected to movement.

Miter cut gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasketK.manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away and join with sealant recommended bygasket manufacturer which will provide an airtight and watertight seal at the joint.

GLAZINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 80 00 - 8

Page 141: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING3.4

Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Use special tool toA.install and remove filler strips; lubricate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated.

PROTECTION AND CLEANING3.5

Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossedA.streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Removenonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from constructionB.operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact withglass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces atC.frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt,scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.

Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any wayD.and from any source, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism.

Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days beforeE.date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass asrecommended by glass manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 08 80 00

GLAZINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

08 80 00 - 9

Page 142: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes non-structural metal framing assemblies for interior partitions and suspendedA.gypsum board ceilings.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1

Gypsum Board Assembly Deflections:A.

Typical Walls: Wall assemblies shall be constructed for deflection not to exceed 1/240 of1.the wall height when subjected to a positive and negative pressure of 5 psf .Walls with Tile Finish: Wall assemblies to receive tile finishes shall be constructed for2.deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the wall height when subjected to a positive andnegative pressure of 5 psf .Ceilings, bulkheads, soffits, ceiling transitions, ledges, and coves shall be constructed for3.a deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the distance between supports.

STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING FRAMING2.2

Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use 0.0312 inch minimum base metal thickness andA.minimum depth as required to suit deflection criteria.

Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 inch diameterB.wire, or double strand of 0.0475 inch diameter wire.

Hanger Attachments to Overhead Decks: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated fromC.corrosion-resistant materials, with eyepins, clips or other devices for attaching hangers andcapable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by the completeceiling system.

Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 inch diameter.D.

Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510 , mild carbon steel.1.

Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538E.inch , a minimum 1/2 inch wide flange, with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinccoating.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 22 16 - 1

Page 143: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M,F.G40 , hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. No equivalent coatings allowed.

Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538 inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 inch wide1.flange, 3/4 inch deep.Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.2.

Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch .a.

STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING2.3

General: Provide steel framing members sized and spaced as indicated but not less than thatA.required to comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

In areas where top of partitions are dependent on ceiling system for lateral support,1.coordinate design and installation to comply with specified deflection limitations.Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with2.ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 , hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. No equivalent coatings(EQ) allowed.

Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in minimum depth indicated in partition type details.B.Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As required to comply with deflection criteria but not1.less than 0.0179 inch (typical partitions), 0.033 inch (minimum thickness at partitionssupporting wall mounted casework).Depth: As indicated.2.

Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: For channel bridging for fixture attachment or lateral bracingC.provide 0.0538 inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 inch wide flange:

Depth: 1-1/2 inches .1.Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch , 0.068 inch thick, galvanized steel.2.

Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.D.

Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch .1.Depth: 7/8 inch .2.

Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, andE.other properties required to fasten steel members securely to substrates involved; complyingwith the recommendations of the gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 22 16 - 2

Page 144: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1

Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Remove sprayed fire-resistive materialsA.only to extent necessary for installation of the non-structural metal framing and withoutreducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtainfire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL3.2

General: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754, ASTM C 840 and the gypsumA.board manufacturer's recommendations; where standards conflict the more stringent shallapply.

Install supplementary framing, blocking, backerplates and bracing at locations in gypsum boardB.assemblies which are indicated to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars,toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and withgypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United StatesGypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook."

INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING FRAMING3.3

Suspended Ceiling Framing: Suspend ceiling hangers plumb and free from contact withA.insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural orceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offsetresulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so membersB.for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on eachmember and transversely between parallel members.

INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING3.4

Install continuous runners (tracks) sized to match studs at floors, ceilings, and structural wallsA.and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. Secure runners tosubstrates with fasteners spaced a maximum of 24 inches on center unless closer spacing isrecommended by the framing manufacturer for the floor and ceiling construction involved.Provide fasteners at all corners and ends of runner tracks.

Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam gasket isolation strip1.between studs and wall.Install two beads of sealant below floor tracks for acoustical and dust control.2.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 22 16 - 3

Page 145: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfacesB.vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.

Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspendedC.ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings and at partialheight partitions. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame aroundducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.

Install backerplates for support of wall mounted items.D.

Isolation Strip Attachment: Where partitions abut exterior wall window mullions, and partitionE.filler panels are not indicated, adhesively attach isolation strips to window mullions. Centerisolation strips on mullion to form a continuous, sound resistant and lightproof, recessed jointseal for the entire length of the interface between the partition studs and trim members and thevertical window mullions.

END OF SECTION 09 22 16

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 22 16 - 4

Page 146: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes gypsum wallboard for partitions and ceilings, and tile backer boards.A.

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS1.2

Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's writtenA.recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

GYPSUM BOARD2.1

Gypsum Board for Wall, Soffit, and Ceiling Surfaces: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, Type X; 5/8A.inch thick, long edges tapered.

TILE BACKING PANELS2.2

Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with core typeA.indicated, 5/8 inch thickness.

Cementitious Backer Units for Installation of Glass Tile: ANSI A118.9, 1/2 inch thickness.B.

GYPSUM BOARD ACCESSORIES AND FINISHING MATERIALS2.3

Interior Steel Trim Accessories: ASTM C 1047; galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet,A.rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

Joint Tape: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.B.

Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.1.Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.2.

Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatibleC.with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by manufacturer.D.

GYPSUM BOARDCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 29 00 - 1

Page 147: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.E.

Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).F.

Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne soundG.transmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according toASTM E 90, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Provide one of the following:

SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; U.S. Gypsum.1.AC-20 FTR; Pecora.2.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD3.1

Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.A.

Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intendedB.for tape.

Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:C.

Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher1.level of finish is required for sound-rated assemblies.Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile and where indicated.2.Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.3.Level 5: Over entire surface of gypsum board ceilings and soffits, and where gypsum4.board is indicated to receive wall coverings, semi-gloss and high gloss paints.

END OF SECTION 09 29 00

GYPSUM BOARDCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 29 00 - 2

Page 148: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes ceramic, porcelain, quarry, and glass tile.A.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS1.2

General: Provide floor tiles complying with the following standard and performanceA.requirements.

Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (DCOF): For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provideB.products with the following value as determined by testing identical products by the DCOFAcuTest Method per ANSI A 137.1, 2012 Edition.

Walkway Surfaces: Minimum 0.42.1.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: Submit product data for each product indicated.A.

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing the extent of each type of movement joint.B.Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints intile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

Samples: Submit samples showing full range of color and texture variations expected.C.

Full size units of each type, composition, color, and finish of tile.1.Assembled samples with grouted joints for each color grout and for each type,2.composition, color, and finish of tile.Thresholds in 6-inch lengths, each type.3.Metal edge strip trim in 6-inch lengths, each type.4.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.4

Test Reports: Submit test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating andA.interpreting test results relative to compliance of tile products with requirements specified forslip resistance.

Maintenance Instructions: Submit maintenance instructions for each type of product specified.B.

TILINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 30 00 - 1

Page 149: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Master Grade Certificates: Submit master grade certificates for each shipment, type, andC.composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

Product Certificates: Submit manufacturers certifications for each type of grout and bondingD.material being provided are suitable for the intended use and meet or exceed the referencedstandards and the requirements of this specification.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.5

Maintenance Instructions: Submit maintenance instructions for each type of product specified.A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.6

Installer: Engage an installer, with a minimum of 5 years of successful commercial tileA.installations similar in material, design, and scope to that indicated.

Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from one source or producer, and from sameB.production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for eachcontiguous area.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.7

Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labelsA.intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tilepackages.

Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and otherB.causes.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.8

Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete andA.ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated inreferenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

Maintain temperatures within range recommended by the mortar and grout manufacturer, butB.not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F, in spaces during tile setting. After installationmaintain temperatures within range recommended by the mortar and grout manufacturer.

Close spaces to traffic during tile flooring installation.C.

Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after tile flooring installation.D.

TILINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 30 00 - 2

Page 150: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Shade all tile, materials and the work area from direct sunlight during the installation as neededE.to prevent rapid evaporation caused by excessive heat or wind.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

TILE PRODUCTS, GENERAL (CT##)2.1

ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1A."Specifications for Ceramic Tile, " and ANSI A137.2, "Specifications for Glass Tile," for types,compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

Products and Manufacturers: Provide tile matching the Architect's samples which have1.been selected from the product lines and manufacturers indicated in the Finish Scheduleon the Drawings.

Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies asB.standard with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes andC.coursing where applicable.

Rectified Tile Edges: Provide all tile units having a face dimension of greater than 8•• xD.8•• with factory rectified edges.

ACCESSORY MATERIALS2.2

Waterproofing for Toilet Room and Kitchen Tile Installations:A.

Fabric-Reinforced and Unreinforced, Fluid-Applied Product: System consisting of1.liquid-latex rubber, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)(ASTM D 3960), and fabric reinforcementwhich are compatible with mortar bed specified and complying with ANSI A118.10; oneof the following:

Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane.a.LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane.b.MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic AquaDefense.c.Ardex; Ardex 8+9.d.

SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS2.3

Manufacturers:A.

Custom Building Products.1.

TILINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 30 00 - 3

Page 151: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

LATICRETE International Inc.2.MAPEI Corporation.3.ARDEX.4.

Source Limitations: For each tile installation, obtain compatible formulations of setting andB.grouting materials containing latex or latex additives from a single manufacturer.

Polymer-Modified Tile Grout (For Typical Applications): ANSI A118.7.C.

Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible latex/polymer powder form, prepackaged with other1.dry ingredients or a liquid latex admixture.Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturers standards to match tile being2.grouted.

Epoxy Grout (For Kitchen Applications): ANSI A118.3, water-cleanable epoxy with a VOCD.content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method24)(ASTM D 3960).

Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to1.temperatures of up to 140 deg F and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified bymanufacturer for intended use.Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturers standards to match tile being2.grouted.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.4

Joint Sealants:A.

Typical Surfaces: ''Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant', as specified in Section 07 92 00,1.Joint Sealants.Floor Joints: 'Two-Part Polyurethane Sealant for Paving Applications', as specified in2.Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile andB.grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and groutmanufacturers.

Metal Edge Strips for Wall Applications: Metallic, angle or L-shaped, depth to match tile andC.setting-bed thickness and having an integral provision for anchorage to substrate; white zincalloy exposed-edge material; furnish in longest lengths available.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers1.offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:

Blanke Corporation.a.Ceramic Tool Company, Inc.b.Schluter Systems L.P.c.

TILINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 30 00 - 4

Page 152: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Divider, Transition, and Movement Joint Strips:D.

Divider and Transition Strips: Stainless steel shapes and flat bar trims fabricated from1.ASTM A 666 (for flat bar) and ASTM A 276 (for shapes) Type 304 stainless steel,1/4inch wide at top edge unless otherwise indicated, depth as required to suit conditionsshown and having an integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unlessotherwise indicated. Provide NAAMM #4 satin finish at exposed top edge in the longdirection, furnish in longest lengths available.Movement Joint Strips: Laminations of extruded aluminum or formed stainless steel2.angle shapes, depth as required to finish flush with top surface of adjacent tile flooringfields, back to back installed with full height flexible filler to accommodate movement.Control joints shall have either an exposed approximately 5/8 inch wide interlockingcontinuous top to conceal prefabricated flexible filler or an exposed custom flexibleprefabricated filler to accommodate movement. Joint assembly shall have a totalmovement capability of approximately 1/4 +1/8 inch/-3/32 /inch. Finish of exposed topto be satin. One of the following:

Basis of Design: Emseal Series ESF 16 ¦¦AL; Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd.a.Schluter; Dilex - EDP, fabricated to comply with the specified requirements.b.CTC (Ceramic Tool Company); CTC Joint custom fabricate to comply with thec.specified requirements.Vexcolt; Ti-Lock Metal, TAM NL 42151 (for thickset) or TAM NA 1212 (ford.medium and thinset).

MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT2.5

Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and groutA.manufacturers' written instructions. Add materials and liquid latex additives in accurateproportions. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers,mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality withoptimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREINSTALLATION MEETING3.1

Prior to the installation of tile, and at the Contractor's direction, meet at the project site toA.review the material selections, substrate preparations, installation procedures, coordination withother trades, special details and conditions, standard of workmanship, and other pertinent topicsrelated to the Work. The meeting shall include the Owner, Architect, the Contractor, tileinstaller, tile and setting material manufacturer's representatives, and representatives of othertrades or subcontractors affected by the installation.

TILINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 30 00 - 5

Page 153: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

EXAMINATION3.2

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present.A.

Verify that substrates for setting tile are sound and free of voids, bugholes, rock pockets,1.honeycombs, and protrusions; and which are dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, andcuring compounds. Grind or scarify concrete substrates to remove existing flooradhesive and mortar residues (if any), laitance, films, sealing and curing compounds ifthey are determined to be present on the substrate.Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical2.units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed beforeinstalling tile.Verify that joints and cracks in the existing floor substrates are coordinated with tile joint3.locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.Do not commence installation of flooring materials until floor substrate is within the4.following tolerances in all directions. If substrate is not within tolerance, level thesubstrate using a method and a product(s) that is compatible with and acceptable to thesetting materials manufacturer.

Subfloor Surfaces to Receive Thinset and Medium Set Setting Beds: +/- 1/8 incha.in 10 feet No valleys or ridges greater than 1/8 inchb.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

PREPARATION3.3

Remove paint, coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that areA.incompatible with tile-setting materials.

Blending: Color blend tiles at Project site before installing.B.

Furnish the same lots, batches, etc. within the same contiguous areas of the site (i.e.,1.corridors on the same floors, common rooms which adjoin each other, etc.).

INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.4

Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications forA.Installation of Ceramic Tile" and the TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone TileInstallation," that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated.

Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form completeB.covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly atobstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

TILINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 30 00 - 6

Page 154: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marringC.visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items forstraight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and otherpenetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

Glass Tile Cutting: Use a blade suitable for cutting glass which must be constantly kept1.wet with water. Cut tiles with the colored surface turned upwards. Cutting shall not becarried out near the edges of the individual tiles. Smooth off any sharp edges withsandpaper. Holes can be made with a drill bit specifically recommended for drilling glasswith a diameter up to 5/16-inch. Apply water continually while drilling.

Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints whenD.adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tilefields in both directions in each space or on each wall area beginning at thresholds. Adjust tominimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.

For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within1.tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

Finished Surfaces: Unless otherwise accepted in the sample installation(s), if any, finishedE.surfaces shall present a flat, even appearance, free from waver, projections, and depressions.

Movement (Contraction, Control, Expansion, and Isolation Joints) Joints: Locate sealant filledF.movement joints where recommended by the manufacturer of mortar and grout materials butnot less than the requirements of TCNA EJ171 which follows, and as accepted by the Architect.Form movement joints and other sealant-filled joints during installation of setting materials,mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. Where movement joints are tobe butted, the ends shall touch and align.

Spacing Guidelines:1.

20 to 25 feet in each direction where interior tile work is not exposed to directa.sunlight or moisture.8 to 12 feet in each direction where interior tile work is exposed to direct sunlightb.and moisture.Where tilework abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, dissimilarc.floors, curbs, columns, pipes, ceilings, and where changes occur in backingmaterials, but not at drain strainers.In the joint between tiles making up the inside corner of planes.d.All contraction, control, expansion, isolation, seismic and cold joints in thee.horizontal structure and vertical surfaces shall continue through the tile surfaces,but not through membranes.Vertical and Horizontal Joints Widths: Widths for quarry tile and paver tile shallf.be the same as the grout joint but not less than 1/4 inch or the width of thecontraction, control, expansion, seismic, isolation joint whichever is greater; widthsfor ceramic mosaic tile and glazed wall tile shall not be less than 1/8 inch or thewidth of the control, expansion, seismic, joint whichever is greater.

TILINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 30 00 - 7

Page 155: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Keep movement joints free from dirt, debris, grout, mortar, and setting bedg.materials. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of wall tile meets other wall finishes that finishG.flush with or below face of tile and the manufacturer of the field tile does not manufacture a tileedge transition trim. Where metal edge strips are indicated and full length single units are notavailable, joints are to be butted, the ends shall touch and align.

WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION3.5

Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's writtenA.instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely tosubstrate.

Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured, and at each1.horizontal installation, has been tested for water tightness. Test waterproofing membranefor watertightness by damming the floor drain, and creating a dam at the perimeter of thewaterproofed basin followed by filling the basin with water, marking the height, andverifying the same height after 48 hours. Repair leaks before continuing with theinstallation of subsequent tile.

FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION3.6

Thinset Tile over Waterproof Membrane (Toilet Rooms and at Kitchens): Install in accordanceA.with the mortar manufacturer's recommendations and requirements indicated below for settingbed methods, installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and groutinstallation methods and grout types. Where recommendations and methods conflict, themanufacturer's recommendations shall apply.

Mortar: Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5.1.Concrete Subfloors, Interior: TCNA F122 (on ground) and F122A (above ground).2.

Apply the mortar to waterproofed slab with the flat side of the trowel.a.With a trowel, having notches sized as recommended by the mortar manufacturer,b.comb the surface of the mortar with the notched side of the trowel removing excessmortar. Spread only as much mortar as can be covered in the time limitsestablished by the mortar manufacturers recommendations.Wipe the back of each tile, with a damp sponge, to remove all dust or dirtc.immediately before applying mortar to tiles.Immediately after wiping tile backs, but prior to placing tile, the mortar shall bed.troweled to back of tile for 100% coverage to thickness of not less than 1/16-inch.Place tiles onto mortar bed, maintaining 1/8-inch wide joints, and true accuratee.pattern as shown. Exercise care to quickly remove spillage from faces of tile usingdamp sponges. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout as tile units areset.

TILINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 30 00 - 8

Page 156: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Prohibit foot and wheel traffic on tiled floors for period of time as recommended byf.the mortar manufacturer.

Grout Installation: Do not begin grouting tiles until they are firmly set and, in no case, in3.less than 48 hours after they have been installed. Remove spacers, if any, prior togrouting. For typical installations, comply with Latex-portland cement: ANSI A108.10;grout installation for kitchen installations, epoxy grout: ANSI A108.6. Fill joints ofcushion edged tile to the depth of the cushion; fill joints of square edge tile flush with thetile surface. Do not permit mortar, mounting mesh, or spacer material to show throughgrouted joints. Provide hard finished grout, which is uniform in color, smooth, andwithout voids, pinholes, or low spots. Tool surfaces with shallow concave profile.

Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in one piece, notched to fit neatly at door jambs; setB.in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile in accordance with TCNA Method TR611.

WALL TILE INSTALLATION3.7

Install in accordance with the mortar manufacturer's recommendations and requirementsA.indicated below for ANSI setting bed methods, TCNA installation methods related to types ofconstruction, and grout ANSI installation methods and grout types. Where recommendationsand methods conflict, the manufacturer's recommendations shall apply. Exercise care toquickly remove spillage from faces of tile using damp sponges. Rake out joints to depthrequired to receive grout as tile units are set.

Latex Portland Cement Mortar Installation (using specified latex portland cement mortar1.material): ANSI A108.5.Gypsum Wallboard, Interior (Latex Portland Cement Mortar) Method: TCNA W243,2.place tiles maintaining 1/8-inch wide joints, and true accurate pattern as shown.Cementitious Backerboard (Latex Portland Cement Mortar) Method: TCNA W244C,3.TCNA W244, place tiles maintaining 1/8-inch wide joints, and true accurate pattern asshown.Grout Installation: Do not begin grouting tiles until they are firmly set and, in no case, in4.less than 48 hours after they have been installed. Remove spacers, if any, prior togrouting. Comply with Latex-portland cement: ANSI A108.10. Fill joints of cushionedged tile to the depth of the cushion; fill joints of square edge tile flush with the tilesurface. Do not permit mortar, mounting mesh, or spacer material to show throughgrouted joints. Provide hard finished grout, which is uniform in color, smooth, andwithout voids, pinholes, or low spots. Tool surfaces with shallow concave profile.

CLEANING AND PROTECTING3.8

Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free ofA.foreign matter.

Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.1.

TILINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 30 00 - 9

Page 157: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written2.instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleanersrecommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleanersare safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protectmetal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with cleanwater before and after cleaning.

Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken,B.unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. Replace all cracked, chipped, and broken tileunits with matching tile units; patched tile units will not be permitted.

When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completedC.tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with minimum 40 lb kraft paper or other heavy,breathable, covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting isD.completed.

END OF SECTION 09 30 00

TILINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 30 00 - 10

Page 158: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.A.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.2

Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product indicated.A.

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS1.3

Furnish and store at the site where directed, 2% of each type of acoustic panel installed in theA.Project, packaged in manufacturer's unopened cartons and identified as to contents.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4

Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer, with not less than 5 years experience in theA.installation of materials specified, and who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar inmaterial, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successfulin-service performance.

Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspensionB.system through one source from a single manufacturer.

Performance Requirements: In areas where gypsum wallboard partitions are dependent on theC.ceiling suspension system for lateral support, design and install suspension system componentsto sustain the imposed load from the completed partition system including a minimum inwardand outward pressure of 5 psf normal to the plane of the wall.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5

Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site inA.original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where theywill be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, directsunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilizedB.moisture content.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGSCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 51 13 - 1

Page 159: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.C.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.6

Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until wet work (painting,A.drywall, interior tilework, and concrete leveling) in spaces is complete and dry, work aboveceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at thelevels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

COORDINATION1.7

Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with otherA.construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVACequipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS2.1

Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metalA.suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply withapplicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

Edge Condition of Cross Runners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide mitered type1.cross runner to main tee runner intersections. Coordinate locations of notches in themain tees with adjacent ceiling, light, and diffuser modules to effect a notch freecondition where cross tees are not indicated to intersect with the main tee.

Overhead Deck Hanger Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated inB.ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply withseismic design requirements.

Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from1.corrosion-resistant materials, with eyepins, clips or other accessory devices for attachinghangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5times that imposed by ceiling assembly as determined by testing according to ASTM E488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspectingagency.

Hangers: As follows:C.

Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M,1.Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGSCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 51 13 - 2

Page 160: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load ASTM Ca.635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung" will be less than yield stress of wire, butprovide not less than 12 ga. (0.106-inch)- diameter wire.

Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510, mild carbon steel.2.

Diameter: 1/4-inch.a.Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized.b.

Flat Hangers: Commercial-sheet steel, ASTM A 653/A653M with G60, hot dip3.galvanized zinc coating.

Size: 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.a.

Carrying Channels: ASTM C 754 with G60 coated cold rolled steel channels, 1-1/2-inch, 475D.pounds per 1000 feet.

Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer'sE.standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details andsuspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color asthat used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners; provide in longest standard singlepiece lengths.

Shadow (Stepped Moldings): Stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and1.width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.Form from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges ofsuspension system runners.F Moldings: Provide F moldings at ceiling breaks, soffits, bulkheads, and changes in2.elevation other than vertical walls and columns to the extent indicated. Form from sheetmetal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension systemrunners.

Clips: Provide support clips, clamps, fasteners, splines, and other attachment devices asF.required to align components and to connect components and transfer imposed loads ofsuspension system.

Provide partition attachment clips, and fasteners for areas where partition ceiling runners1.are secured to the ceiling suspension system.Provide attachment clips for runner to angle molding to avoid use of pop rivets.2.Provide grid converter accessories as required to change main tee direction 90 degrees3.from adjacent main tee.Provide light fixture clips.4.Provide hold down clips at entryways to reduce flutter as required.5.Provide miter closure clips.6.

Manufacturers and Products: Refer to drawings and schedules for extent and types of eachG.metal suspension system required.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGSCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 51 13 - 3

Page 161: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

ACOUSTICAL PANELS (CL##)2.2

Basis-of-Design Manufacturer and Product: Refer to drawings and schedules for extent andA.types of each acoustical panel required.

Subject to requirements, provide the basis-of-design product, or a comparable product,1.acceptable to the Architect, by one of the following:

American Gypsum.a.Armstrong World Industries, Inc.b.CertainTeed Corporation.c.Chicago Metallic Corporation.d.Rockfon (Roxul Inc.).e.Tectum Inc.f.United States Gypsum Company.g.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acousticalA.panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specifiedin this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation, anchorage, with requirements forinstallation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

PREPARATION3.2

Layout the Work to center board pattern both directions around Work points shown in eachA.major space or room as shown on the drawings or directed and, where possible, adjust patternso that edge pieces will be not less than 1/2 unit in width.

INSTALLATION3.3

General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismicA.requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions, and ASTM C 636, and CISCA's"Ceiling Systems Handbook," and as required to match the accepted sample installation.

Suspend ceiling hangers as follows:B.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGSCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 51 13 - 4

Page 162: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Fasten hangers to anchors that extend into decks. Space hangers not more than 48 inches1.along each member supported directly from hangers; and provide hangers not more than6 inches from ends of each member. Provide additional hangers for support of fixturesand other items including but not limited to light fixtures and diffusers, as required toprevent overloading of deck attachment, eccentric deflection or rotation of supportingrunners.Hangers:2.

Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with aa.minimum of 3 tight turns. Connect hangers directly to drilled in anchors (eyescrews), or other devices that are secure, and are appropriate for substrate.Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediateb.framing members, by attaching to drilled in anchors, or other devices that aresecure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and thetype of hanger involved.

Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces3.by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling4.plenum that are not part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system.Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger5.spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standardsuspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers inform of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members andhangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referencedstandards and publications.

Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area andC.where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Align moldings accurately and screwattach securely to substrate with concealed fasteners at intervals not more than 16 inches oncenter and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system. Mitercorners accurately and connect securely.

Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.1.

Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.D.Clip runners to angle moldings do not use exposed fasteners. Finish to lines and levels shown,with maximum deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the span between supports. Laser levelaccurately in all directions, leveling to a tolerance of 1/8 -inch noncumulative. Remove andreplace dented, bent, or kinked members.

Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension systemE.runners and edge moldings. Run grain of units in one direction as accepted on shop drawings.Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install1.panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panelfaces flush with bottom face of runners.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGSCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 51 13 - 5

Page 163: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

CLEANING3.4

Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, andA.suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning andtouchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot besuccessfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION 09 51 13

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGSCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 51 13 - 6

Page 164: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

GENERALPART 1 -

FIELD CONDITIONS1.1

Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have beenA.completed.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES2.1

Resilient Wall Base: Refer to the Finish Schedule and the Drawings. Nominal thickness notA.less than 1/8 inch unless greater thickness is scheduled. All resilient base shall bemanufactured from rubber complying with ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanizedthermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic), Group I (solid, homogeneous). Provide allresilient wall base in continuous coils to minimize field butt joints. Provide all resilient wallbases with a coved base toe style typically and with straight flat or toeless base style at carpet,unless otherwise indicated on the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.

Resilient Molding Accessories:B.

Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering.1.Material: Rubber.2.Profile and Dimensions: As indicated on the Drawings.3.

Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products andC.substrate conditions indicated. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOCcontent when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.1.Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.2.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION3.1

Prepare substrates and install products according to manufacturer's written recommendations.A.

Wall Base: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.B.

RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIESCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 65 13 - 1

Page 165: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and1.other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of2.adjacent pieces aligned.Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in3.continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.Do not stretch wall base during installation.4.

Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substratesC.throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that wouldotherwise be exposed.

Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.D.

END OF SECTION 09 65 13

RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIESCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 65 13 - 2

Page 166: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 09 65 19 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

GENERALPART 1 -

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.1

Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for resilient floor tile and floor finish products.A.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.2

Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have beenA.completed.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING2.1

Resilient Tile Products: Refer to Finish Schedule on drawings.A.

ACCESSORIES2.2

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement basedA.formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.

Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.B.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION3.1

Prepare concrete substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensureA.adhesion of resilient products.

Prepare concrete substrates according to ASTM F 710. Verify that substrates are dry and freeB.of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. Perform alkalinity and adhesion testsrecommended by manufacturer. Perform moisture tests recommended by manufacturer.Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

Remove paint, sealers, substrate coatings, existing floor covering adhesive residues (if any),C.and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives using mechanical methodsrecommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

RESILIENT TILE FLOORINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 65 19 - 1

Page 167: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions inD.substrates.

Apply primer to concrete slabs, if recommended by the flooring manufacturer, prior toE.application of adhesive.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.F.

Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanentG.fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tilesH.to center of door openings.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.I.

Choose option below or delete paragraph if not applicable.J.

Floor Polish for [Vinyl Composition Tile] [Solid Vinyl Tile]: Remove soil, visible adhesive,K.and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. Applynumber of coats as recommended by manufacturer.

Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.L.

END OF SECTION 09 65 19

RESILIENT TILE FLOORINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 65 19 - 2

Page 168: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING

GENERALPART 1 -

STANDARDS1.1

Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with theA.applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:

The Carpet and Rug Institute "The Carpet Specifiers' Handbook."1.The Carpet and Rug Institute "CRI 104; Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet,2.edition Sept. 2015" (CRI 104).

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.2

Maintenance Data: Submit copies of instructions for care, cleaning, maintenance and repair ofA.carpet tiles.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.3

Installer Qualifications: Engage a carpet installer, who has completed a minimum of threeA.projects over the last 10 years which were similar in material, design and extent to thatindicated for the Project - as determined by the Architect - and which have resulted inconstruction with a record of successful in service performance.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.4

General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.0 "Site Conditions."A.

Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tile until wet work in spaces isB.complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained atoccupancy levels during remainder of construction.

TILE CARPETINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 68 13 - 1

Page 169: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

WARRANTY1.5

Special Carpet Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile manufacturerA.agreeing to replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within 10years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failureof carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include,but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, wear, static buildup in excess of3.0 kV when tested under the Standard Shuffle Test at 70 deg F and 20 percent RH, edgeraveling without seam sealers, tuft bind loss, zippering (wet or dry), shrinkage, curling, doming,snags, runs, and delamination. Warrantees shall be full term, not pro-rated for the specifiedwarranty period.

Special Carpet Tile Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile installerB.agreeing to fix, repair or replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that failswithin 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration orfailure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failuresinclude, but are not limited to, more than edge raveling, shrinkage, curling, doming, anddelamination.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

CARPET TILE (CP##)2.1

Carpet Tile Types: Provide manufacturer's commercial grade carpet tile for 100 percentA.glue-down installation as indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.

INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES2.2

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Portland cement-based formulation providedA.by or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Do not use gypsum based compounds.

Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, and nonstaining, pressure sensitive type to suitB.products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements forintended carpet tile, and recommended by manufacturer for releasable installation. Provideadhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,Subpart D (EPA Method 24)

Carpet Edging: Provide rubber composition carpet edging in single lengths wherever possible,C.keeping the number of joints or splices to a minimum. Provide in every location where carpetterminates and other flooring continues. Color to match adjacent carpet types.

Floor Sealer: Type as recommended and manufactured by the carpet tile manufacturer for theD.applications indicated. Provide floor sealer with VOC content not more than 200 g/L whencalculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).

TILE CARPETINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 68 13 - 2

Page 170: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withA.requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and otherconditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, andpotential defects.

Verify that concrete slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners,B.and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and drynesscharacteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tilemanufacturer.

PREPARATION3.2

General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8.0 "Substrate Preparation," and with carpet tileA.manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receivecarpet tile installation.

INSTALLATION3.3

General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10.0 "Carpet Tile Installation," carpet tileA.manufacturer's written installation instructions, and as required to match the accepted sampleinstallations. Apply adhesive in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's directions.

Adhere all full size, perimeter tiles, and cut tiles, with a full spread of adhesive. Dry fit cut tilesB.and apply adhesive to tile back after tile has been cut. Use full uncut tiles down the center ofcorridors and, where necessary, cut perimeter tiles to butt walls.

Butt carpet tile tightly together to form seams without gaps or entrapped pile yarns and alignedC.with adjoining tiles.

Install edge strip at every location where edge of carpet is exposed to traffic, unless otherwiseD.indicated. Unless otherwise directed by Architect install in single lengths and secure inaccordance with manufacturer's directions.

Traffic over adhesive installations shall be restricted until adhesive has properly cured inE.accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's recommendations.

As the carpeting is installed, remove and dispose of all trimmings, excess pieces of carpetingF.and laying materials from each area as it is completed. Vacuum carpeting with a commercialvacuum, having a cylindrical brush or beater bar and high suction. Remove adhesives, stains,and soil spots in accordance with the carpet manufacturer's recommendations.

TILE CARPETINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 68 13 - 3

Page 171: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 11.0 "Post Installation," andG.against damage; damaged carpeting shall be rejected. Use non-staining cover material forprotection. Tape joints of protective covering. Plastic and polyethylene sheet protectivecoverings shall not be permitted.

Remove and replace rejected carpeting with new carpet tile. At the completion of the WorkH.and when directed by the Architect, remove covering, vacuum clean carpeting and removesoiling and stains (if any) to the satisfaction of the Architect.

END OF SECTION 09 68 13

TILE CARPETINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 68 13 - 4

Page 172: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 09 68 16 - SHEET CARPETING

GENERALPART 1 -

STANDARDS1.1

Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with theA.applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:

The Carpet and Rug Institute "The Carpet Specifiers' Handbook."1.The Carpet and Rug Institute "CRI 104; Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet,2.edition Sept. 2015" (CRI 104).

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.2

Maintenance Data: Submit copies of instructions for care, cleaning, maintenance and repair ofA.carpeting.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.3

Installer Qualifications: Engage a carpet installer, who has completed a minimum of threeA.projects over the last 10 years which were similar in material, design and extent to thatindicated for the Project – as determined by the Architect – and which have resulted inconstruction with a record of successful in service performance.

Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet identical to those of assembliesB.tested for fire response per NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.4

Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,A.and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated forProject when occupied for its intended use.

SHEET CARPETINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 68 16 - 1

Page 173: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

WARRANTY1.5

Special Carpet Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturerA.agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within 10 yearsfrom date of Substantial Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure ofcarpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but arenot limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, wear, static buildup in excess of 3.0 kVwhen tested under the Standard Shuffle Test at 70 deg F and 20 percent RH, edge raveling, tuftbind loss, shrinkage, zippering (wet or dry), excess static discharge, and delamination.Warrantees shall be full term, not pro-rated for the specified warranty period.

Installation Warranty: Submit copies of written warranty signed by the carpet installer andB.Contractor, warranting the carpet installation, for a period of 2 years, that the carpeting will nottear, crack, separate, deteriorate or pull loose from substrate, or experience seam failure,ripples, scallops, pilling or puckering.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

CARPET (CP##)2.1

Carpet Types: Provide manufacturer's commercial grade broadloom carpet for 100%A.glue-down installation as indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.

INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES2.2

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Portland cement based formulation providedA.by or recommended by the carpet manufacturer. Do not use gypsum based compounds.

Carpet Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew resistant, and nonstaining, high solids, low VOCB.emitting formulations that are specifically recommended by the carpet manufacturer, as verifiedthrough compatibility and adhesion testing for the intended substrate and application, and thatcomply with flammability requirements for installed carpetProvide adhesives with VOCcontent not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPAmethod 24).

Seaming Cement: Water-resistant and flame-resistant carpet adhesive for sealing raw edges,C.seaming, reinforcing seams and patching. Provide fast drying, easy spreading carpet seamingadhesive having excellent aging characteristics recommended by the carpet manufacturer.

Carpet Edging: Provide rubber composition carpet edging in single lengths wherever possible,D.keeping the number of joints or splices to a minimum. Provide in quantities and locations asjob required based upon the recommended good practice of the industry; include in everylocation where carpet terminates and other flooring continues. Color to match adjacent carpettypes.

SHEET CARPETINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 68 16 - 2

Page 174: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Floor Sealer: Type as recommended and manufactured by the carpet manufacturer for theE.applications indicated. Provide floor sealer with VOC content not more than 200 g/L whencalculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1

General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3 "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and withA.carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.

Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is toB.be installed. Verify recommended limits for moisture content and alkalinity of concretesubstrates with carpet manufacturer.

Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with the following:C.

Mechanical Substrate Preparation:1.

Remove coatings, including curing compounds, existing floor covering adhesivea.residues, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and thatcontain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanicalmethods recommended in writing by the carpet manufacturer.In lieu of mechanical substrate preparation methods the Contractor may utilizeb.floor sealer materials and methods of the types and methods as recommended, inwriting, by the carpet manufacturer. Apply sealer in number of coats, and at thespread rate, as required by the carpet manufacturer.

Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other2.materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and drynesscharacteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the carpetmanufacturer.Use leveling and patching compounds recommended by flooring manufacturer for filling3.cracks, holes and depressions in the substrate. Surface shall be smooth, level and atproper elevation. Remove ridges, roughness and protrusions from concrete surfaces bygrinding.

INSTALLATION3.2

100 Percent Direct Glue Down of Broadloom Carpet: Comply with the manufacturer'sA.instructions, CRI 104, Section 13 "Direct Glue-Down Installation," and as required to match theaccepted sample installations.

Apply adhesive in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's directions.1.Adhere carpet with a full spread of adhesive. Ensure uniform bond over the entire area.2.

SHEET CARPETINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 68 16 - 3

Page 175: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Install edge strip at every location where edge of carpet is exposed to traffic, unless3.otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise directed by Architect install in single lengths andsecure in accordance with manufacturer's directions.Traffic over adhesive installations shall be restricted until adhesive has properly cured in4.accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's recommendations.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.3

Cleaning: As the carpeting is installed, remove and dispose of all trimmings, excess pieces ofA.carpeting and laying materials from each area as it is completed. Vacuum carpeting with acommercial vacuum, having a cylindrical brush or beater bar and high suction. Removeadhesives, stains, and soil spots in accordance with the carpet manufacturer's recommendations.

Protection: Protect carpeting against damage of every kind as damaged carpeting shall beB.rejected. Use non-staining cover material for protection. Tape joints of protective covering.Plastic and polyethylene sheet protective coverings shall not be permitted over glue downinstallations.

Remove and replace rejected carpeting with new carpeting. At the completion of the work andC.when directed by the Architect, remove covering, vacuum clean carpeting and remove soilingand stains (if any) to the satisfaction of the Architect.

END OF SECTION 09 68 16

SHEET CARPETINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 68 16 - 4

Page 176: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 09 72 00 - WALL COVERINGS

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes wall coverings.A.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.2

Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product indicated.A.

Samples: Submit wall covering samples in full width by 36-inch- long sections of wallB.covering for each wall covering indicated and for each color, pattern, and texture required.Include sample sets with specified treatments applied. Samples shall show complete patternrepeat.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.3

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in the installationA.of wall coverings similar to that required for this project.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.4

Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until wet-work in spaces isA.completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidityconditions are and will be continuously maintained at the levels indicated when the site isoccupied for its intended use.

Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on theB.surfaces to receive wall covering.

Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the timeC.recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.

EXTRA MATERIALS1.5

Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, from the same productionA.run as the wall coverings installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storageand identified with labels describing contents.

WALL COVERINGSCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 72 00 - 1

Page 177: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Rolls of Wall Covering Material: Full-width rolls of wall covering equal to 5 percent of1.amount of each type installed, but not less than 1 full roll.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

ACCESSORIES2.1

Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wallA.covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer,and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24)(ASTM D 3960).

Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer recommended in writing by wall-coveringB.manufacturer for intended substrate and with a VOC content of 200 g/L or less whencalculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)(ASTM D 3960).

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forA.levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affectingperformance of work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have beencorrected.

PREPARATION3.2

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.A.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew,B.oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust.

Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking,C.unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.

Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall-covering manufacturer.1.Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.2.Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply rust-inhibitive zinc primer.3.Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new concrete masonry units when tested4.with an electronic moisture meter.

Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes withD.fine sandpaper.

WALL COVERINGSCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 72 00 - 2

Page 178: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Remove electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items.E.

Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areasF.not less than 24 hours before installation.

INSTALLATION3.3

Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable toA.products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

CLEANING3.4

Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by the wall covering manufacturer. ReplaceA.strips that cannot be cleaned.

Reinstall electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items.B.

Remove all droppings, trimmings, and other debris, and protect the installation so that it will beC.clean and without indication of damage at the time of acceptance by the Architect.

END OF SECTION 09 72 00

WALL COVERINGSCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 72 00 - 3

Page 179: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 09 77 13 - STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMS

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes stretched fabric wall systems.A.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.2

Product Data: Submit product data for each type of frame and core material specified.A.

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including attachment devices; seaming diagrams; andB.details at head, base, joints, corners and intersections with shelves, countertops, doors,electrical outlets and switches, thermostats, and other components. Indicate frame edge andcore materials.

Include elevations showing panel sizes and direction of fabric weave.1.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.3

Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions for stretched-fabric systems includingA.fabric manufacturer's cleaning and stain-removal recommendations.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4

Installer Qualifications: Engage a firm with a minimum of 5 years successful experience in theA.fabrication and erection of fabric wall panel units of similar sizes, shapes, and finishes to theunits required for this Project, and which has ample production facilities to produce, furnish,and supply the units as required for this Project.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5

Framing members, fabrics, and core materials shall be delivered to the job site and storedA.elevated above the floor in an enclosed space with proper ventilation and protection fromdamage.

Comply with fabric manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximumB.temperature and humidity requirements for storage.

STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMSCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 77 13 - 1

Page 180: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

FIELD CONDITIONS1.6

Environmental Limitations: Do not install stretched-fabric systems until wet-work in spaces isA.complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidityconditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements.B.

Lighting during Installation: Provide not less than 50 fc on surface to be covered.C.

WARRANTY1.7

Special Warranty: Provide a written warranty for a period of at least two years from date ofA.substantial completion that the fabric installation shall remain dimensionally stable year roundand will not sag or distort due to variances in temperature and humidity conditions. Furtherwarranty that the grain and weave will be level and true and that all seams are plumb and truewithout sagging and equally spaced. If the fabric should sag due to climatic conditions, or ifthe fabric or seams are imperfect, the installing contractor will replace or repair, restretch andreinstall the fabric at his own expense. The Owner and/or Architect will be the determinant ifthe fabric is sagging, distorted or imperfect in any way.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Panels shall comply with "Surface-BurningA.Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined bytesting identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction:

Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a1.qualified testing agency on systems prepared according to ASTM E 2573. Identifyproducts with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.a.Smoke-Developed Index: [250] <Insert value> or less.b.

Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities2.having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265.

SYSTEMS AND MANUFACTURERS2.2

General: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:A.

STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMSCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 77 13 - 2

Page 181: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Accutrack Upholstered Wall System; Accutrack Systems.1.Type SWB Butt Joint Snap-Loc; StretchWall Products, Inc.2.Fabri-Trak Upholstered Wall System, Fabri-Trak Systems, Inc.3.Snap-Tex Acoustical Fabric Mounting System; Snap-Tex, (800) 762-7875.4.

STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEM COMPONENTS (SF##)2.3

Fabric: As indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings and specified under Section 09 72 00A."Wall Coverings." Fabrics shall be shop cut, stitched together, squared and trimmed toappropriate sizes. All sewing shall be perfectly straight, seams pressed flat.

Edge Profile: Square.B.

Frame System: Extruded PVC or Extruded aluminum as follows:C.

SnapLoc 90; Stretchwall Products, Inc.1.

CORE MATERIALS2.4

Provide glass-fiber board insulation as follows:A.

Acoustical Infill: Standard acoustical infill manufactured from 1 inch thick unless1.otherwise indicated, 6 lb. density compressible fiberglass having an NRC value of 0.80.Knauf Insulation; Acoustical Smooth Board with ECOSE Technology.2.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine fabric, substrates, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withA.requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance ofstretched-fabric systems.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.1.

INSTALLATION3.2

Acclimatize Fabric: Before installation, allow fabric to adjust to and become stable at ambientA.temperature and humidity of spaces where it will be installed.

STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMSCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 77 13 - 3

Page 182: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Install framing members at the areas indicated to receive fabric wall panels around theB.perimeter of each fabric panel. Install framing members wherever practical, in one continuouspiece with smooth edges so as not to show irregularities. All framing members shall beinstalled, shimmed, plumbed, scribed and trued to align perfectly with adjacent surfaces. Allframing members shall be installed in such a way as to prevent them from sagging or movingout of position after fabric has been stretched tightly over them.

Install core materials flush with face of stretched-fabric system track. Core shall be smooth andC.free from bumps and protrusions. Bond or fasten core materials to substrate by methodrecommended by stretched-fabric system manufacturer.

Woof and warp yarns shall be stretched perfectly square and plumbed so that the fabric is notD.distorted and does not pucker or ripple. If sewn seams are required, they shall be squared witha plumb bob and must be true top to bottom without wavering. All fabrics shall be stretchedand secured in such a way as not to show the fastening technique. All fabrics shall be blindfastened using manufacturer's proprietary fabric tensioning system framing on all sides of eachwall area in and around cut-outs without the use of any gimp, trim, hand sewing, welts orbatons. All fabric pattern and grains shall match horizontally and be perfectly level.

Fabric shall be removable in case of damage and easily replaceable without affecting adjacentE.surfaces.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.3

During installation, protect all existing work from damage. Remove all trimmings and otherA.debris.

Immediately after the installation is completed, thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces andB.finished materials and restore all damaged surfaces to the complete satisfaction of the Ownerand the Architect.

Vacuum all exposed fabric surfaces.1.Trim and remove all loose threads.2.

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING3.4

Train Owner's permanent maintenance staff in the proper methods of maintaining, removing,A.installing, and replacing fabric material.

END OF SECTION 09 77 13

STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMSCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 77 13 - 4

Page 183: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior items and surfaces.A.

Paint exposed surfaces. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item orB.surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. Painting includes field painting ofexposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel andiron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have afactory-applied final finish.

Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, andC.labels.

DEFINITIONS1.2

General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.A.

Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 5 when measured at an1.60-degree meter.Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 10 when measured2.at a 60-degree meter.Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when3.measured at a 60-degree meter.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3

Product Data: Submit product data for each paint system indicated. Include block fillers andA.primers.

Samples: Submit samples for each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulateB.actual conditions.

Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including primers. Use1.representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen,color, and texture are achieved.Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each2.Sample for location and application.Submit paint samples on 12 inches square of hardboard for the Architect's review of each3.color and texture required.

INTERIOR PAINTINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 91 23 - 1

Page 184: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4

Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed paintingA.system applications similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project,whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as theB.finish coats.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:A.

Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).1.PPG Paints (PPG Architectural Coatings).2.Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).3.

PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL2.2

Material Compatibility: Provide primers and finish-coat materials that are compatible with oneA.another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, asdemonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

VOC Classification: Provide materials, including primers, undercoats, and finish-coatB.materials, that meet the following criteria for VOC classification:

50 grams/liter or less for flat coatings.1.100 grams/liter or less for non-flat coatings.2.100 grams/liter or less for primers, sealers, and undercoaters.3.

Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coatingC.types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for applicationindicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification willnot be acceptable.

Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors1.or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to theexclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's materialdata and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

Colors: Provide custom colors of the finished paint systems to match Architect's samples.D.

INTERIOR PAINTINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 91 23 - 2

Page 185: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

COLOR SCHEDULE2.3

Reference to a particular manufacturer's number or color name is used only as a convenienceA.for the Architect in order to establish the Project color requirements. These references are notintended to describe the required generic paint systems. For generic paint systemsrequirements, refer to the "Schedule of Interior Painting" as applicable to the respectiveconditions of use.

The selection of paint colors are indicated on the drawings by manufacturer and color type;B.designated as "P##" for interior paint finishes.

Furnish the same lots, batches, etc. within the same contiguous areas of the building (i.e.,1.corridors on the same floors, common rooms which adjoin each other, etc.).

Color Schedule: The color schedule shall be considered as a guide only to color requirements;C.subject to Architect's modification or acceptance. For color schedule, refer to Finish Scheduleson Drawings.

PREPARATORY COATS2.4

Interior Primers: Interior latex-based primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended inA.writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.

Ferrous-Metal Primer: Quick drying, rust-inhibitive metal primer.1.Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior2.application.Interior Wood Primer: Factory-formulated acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer.3.Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate4.indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.

INTERIOR FINISH COATS2.5

Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interiorA.application.

Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec WB Interior Flat Finish 443: Applied at a dry film1.thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.PPG Paints; PPG SPEEDHIDE zero VOC Latex Flat 6-4110 Series: Applied at a dry2.film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC Flat B30-2600 Series: Applied at a dry film3.thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.

Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interiorB.enamel.

INTERIOR PAINTINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 91 23 - 3

Page 186: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec WB Interior Eggshell 444: Applied at a dry film thickness1.of not less than 1.4 mils.PPG Paints; PPG SPEEDHIDE zero VOC Latex Eggshell 6-4310 series: Applied at a2.dry film thickness of not less than 1.45 mils.Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC Eg-Shel B20-2600 Series: Applied at a dry3.film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.

Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel forC.interior application.

Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec WB Interior Semi-Gloss 446: Applied at a dry film1.thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.PPG Paints; PPG SPEEDHIDE zero Latex Semigloss 6-4510 series: Applied at a dry2.film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC B31-2600 Series: Applied at a dry film3.thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance withA.requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4.

Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected1.and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

PREPARATION3.2

General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lightingA.fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted or provide surface-appliedprotection before surface preparation and painting. After completing painting operations ineach space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.

Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances thatB.could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process1.will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer'sC.written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. Provide barriercoats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.

INTERIOR PAINTINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 91 23 - 4

Page 187: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral1.spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellaca.or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holesand imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smoothwhen dried.Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat ofb.varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.

Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop2.coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances inaccordance with SSPC SP 1 for “Solvent Cleaning .After solvent cleaning prepare anybare metal surfaces by removing all stratified rust (rust scale), all loose mill scale, allloose or non-adherent rust and detrimental welding deposits by methods specified inSSPC SP-3 for "Power Tool Cleaning."

Touch up bare areas, heads of bolts, welded surfaces which are unpainted, anda.shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solventsrecommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shopcoat.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents in3.accordance with SSPC SP-1 for "Solvent Cleaning", and pretreat in accordance with therecommendations of SSPC Good Painting Practice, Vol. 1, Chapter 22.Gypsum Wallboard: Repair all surfaces in gypsum wallboard with wallboard joint4.finishing compound or spackling compound, filled out flush and sanded smooth. Cleanall surfaces and taped joints of dust, dirt and other contaminants and be sure they arethoroughly dry before applying paint.

Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's writtenD.instructions.

Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of1.foreign materials and residue.Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required2.during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surfacefilm and strain material before using.Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.3.

Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat whenE.multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finishcoat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

INTERIOR PAINTINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 91 23 - 5

Page 188: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

APPLICATION3.3

General Application: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. UseA.applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.1.Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions2.detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.3.The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,4.grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are inplace. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity andprovide desired protection.Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed5.surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixedequipment or furniture with prime coat only.Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through6.registers or grilles.Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed7.surfaces. Access panels, electrical panels, air diffusing outlets, supply and exhaustgrilles, louvers, exposed conduit, primed hardware items, primed outlet covers, primedwall and ceiling plates and other items in painted areas shall be painted to match the areasin which they occur unless otherwise directed by the Architect.Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.8.

Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, orB.otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequentsurface deterioration.

The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application1.method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended bymanufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according tomanufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.2.If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply3.additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give specialattention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive adry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat4.surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel stickyunder moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does notcause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicatorsC.according to manufacturer's written instructions.

INTERIOR PAINTINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 91 23 - 6

Page 189: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate1.size for surface or item being painted.Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by2.manufacturer for material and texture required.Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by3.manufacturer for material and texture required.

Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer'sD.recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry filmthickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to itemsE.exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.

Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:1.

Uninsulated metal piping.a.Uninsulated plastic piping.b.Pipe hangers and supports.c.Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.d.Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inletse.and outlets.Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintablef.jacket material.Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for fieldg.painting.

Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:2.

Conduits and fittings.a.Switchgear.b.Panelboards.c.Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for fieldd.painting.

Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended byF.manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been primecoated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots orunsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or otherdefects due to insufficient sealing.

Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,G.opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not beacceptable.

INTERIOR PAINTINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 91 23 - 7

Page 190: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave noH.evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surfaceimperfections.

Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,I.or repaint work not complying with requirements.

MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION3.4

Mark fire-rated and smoke-rated partitions required to have protective openings or penetrations.A.

Locate markings in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic spaces.1.Provide markings within 15 feet of the end of each wall and at intervals not exceeding 302.feet measured horizontally along the partition.Marking shall include stenciled lettering not less than 3 inches in height with a minimum3.3/8 inch stroke.Apply markings in a contrasting color with the suggested wording "FIRE AND/OR4.SMOKE BARRIER---PROTECT ALL OPENINGS", or other wording as approved bythe Authority Having Jurisdiction.

CLEANING3.5

Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discardedA.paint materials from Project site.

After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered1.paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.

PROTECTION3.6

Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.A.Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing paintingB.operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced paintedsurfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE3.7

Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:A.

Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer at gypsum board ceilings and soffits.1.

INTERIOR PAINTINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 91 23 - 8

Page 191: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.a.Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint.b.

Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer at panels exposed to2.view, unless otherwise indicated.

Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.a.Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.b.

Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer, only where indicated.3.

Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.a.Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.b.

Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior woodB.surfaces:

Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood undercoater.1.

Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel finishes.a.Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.b.

Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:C.

Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.1.

Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.a.Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.b.

Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metalD.surfaces:

Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.1.

Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.a.Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.b.

All-Service Jacket over Insulation: Provide the following finish system on cotton or canvasE.insulation covering:

Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew1.proof.

Finish Coats: Interior flat latex-emulsion size.a.

END OF SECTION 09 91 23

INTERIOR PAINTINGCopyright 2017 Gensler

09 91 23 - 9

Page 192: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 10 44 00 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section includes fire protection specialties.A.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.2

Product Data: Submit product data including construction details, material descriptions,A.dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties.

Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.1.Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods,2.relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type,trim style, panel style.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.3

Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one sourceA.from a single manufacturer.

NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "StandardB.for Portable Fire Extinguishers."

Listing: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL Listing Mark for type, rating, andC.classification of extinguisher.

COORDINATION1.4

Coordinate size of fire-extinguisher cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fireA.extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

WARRANTY1.5

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orA.replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship withinspecified warranty period.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:1.

FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIESCopyright 2017 Gensler

10 44 00 - 1

Page 193: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.a.Faulty operation of valves or release levers.b.

Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS2.1

General: Provide fire extinguishers for each fire extinguisher cabinet and at other locationsA.indicated.

Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher1.indicated and with plated or baked-enamel finish.

Provide brackets for extinguishers located and not located in cabinets.a.

FIRE-EXTINGUISHER CABINETS2.2

General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets of suitable size for housing fire extinguishers ofA.types and capacities specified.

Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, andB.hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grindsmooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

Fire-Rated Cabinets: Listed and labeled to meet requirements in ASTM E 814 for1.fire-resistance rating of wall where it is installed.

Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0478-inch- thick,a.cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick, fire-barrier material.

Cabinet Metal: Enameled-steel sheet.2.Cabinet Mounting: Recessed unless otherwise indicated.3.Cabinet Trim Style: Trimless with hidden flange of same metal and finish as box that4.overlaps surrounding wall finish and that is concealed from view by an overlapping door.Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet.5.Door Material: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet.6.Door Glazing: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:7.

Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3,a.Class 1 (clear).

Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design vertical duo panel with frame with 1/4 inch- 8.thick glass.

FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIESCopyright 2017 Gensler

10 44 00 - 2

Page 194: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials9.indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type10.for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide exposed doorpull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door toopen 180 degrees.

Products and Manufacturers: One of the following:C.

Larsens Manufacturing Company: Occult Series Fire Extinguisher Cabinets, Model1.O-2409 with vertical duo door.Potter Roemer: Dana Series Fire Extinguisher Cabinets, 7220-DV.2.JL Industries, Inc.: Embassy Series Fire Extinguisher Cabinets, Model3.5614-Contemporary V door.

FINISHES2.3

General: Apply finishes in factory after products are assembled. Protect cabinets with plasticA.or paper covering, prior to shipment.

Painted Finishes: Provide painted finish to comply with requirements indicated below forB.extent, preparation and type:

Color: Provide color or color matches indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected1.by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and loose rust or mill scale.2.Field-Paintable Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply to3.surfaces indicated below, manufacturer's standard factory-applied paint system which issuitable, after deglossing, as an undercoat for field-applied paint system specified inDivision 9 Section 'Interior Painting'.

Exterior of cabinet except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish.a.Interior of cabinet.b.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1

Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinetA.and trim style.

INSTALLATION3.2

General: Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.A.

FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIESCopyright 2017 Gensler

10 44 00 - 3

Page 195: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if notB.indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.1.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING3.3

Adjust cabinet doors to operate freely without binding. Examine fire extinguishers for properA.charging and tagging.

Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.1.

On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces asB.recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 10 44 00

FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIESCopyright 2017 Gensler

10 44 00 - 4

Page 196: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 11 00 00 - EQUIPMENT

GENERALPART 1 -

SUBMITTALS1.1

Product Data: Submit product data for each type of equipment required. Include completeA.operating characteristics, dimensions, and finishes for each type of equipment.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of equipment.B.

UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical equipment that are listed and labeled by ULC.and that comply with applicable NEMA standards.

Warranties: Submit manufacturer's standard written warranty, for each type of equipmentD.required, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace equipment or components that failin materials or workmanship within two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

EQUIPMENT2.1

Equipment: Provide residential/pantry appliances, listed in Equipment Schedule on theA.Drawings.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1

Install equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions.A.

Securely anchor built-in equipment to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealedB.fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openingsare completely concealed.

Place freestanding equipment in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area.C.Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.

Mount audio/visual equipment according to manufacturer's instructions for vibration isolationD.of equipment.

EQUIPMENTCopyright 2017 Gensler

11 00 00 - 1

Page 197: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Install projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining constructionE.indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a smoothlyoperating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is lowered.

Test each item of equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments.F.

Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed.G.

Remove packing material from equipment and leave units in clean condition, ready forH.operation.

END OF SECTION 11 00 00

EQUIPMENTCopyright 2017 Gensler

11 00 00 - 2

Page 198: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

SECTION 12 24 13 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1

Section Includes:A.

Manually operated roller shades with single rollers.1.Motor-operated roller shades with single rollers or with double rollers as indicated on the2.drawings.

Related Requirements:B.

Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls,1.limit switches, and other powered devices and for system disconnect switches formotorized shade operation.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.2

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions,A.construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, andoperating instructions.

Motorized Shade Operators: Include operating instructions.1.Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements.2.

Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections,B.details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings,attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work.

Motorized Shade Operators: Show locations and details for installing operator1.components, switches, and controls. Indicate motor size, electrical characteristics, drivearrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions.Wiring Diagrams: Power, system, and control wiring.2.

Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrationsC.and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

Ceiling suspension system members and attachment to building structure.1.Shade mounting assembly and attachment.2.Size and location of access to shade operator, motor, and adjustable components.3.Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot .4.

ROLLER WINDOW SHADESCopyright 2017 Gensler

12 24 13 - 1

Page 199: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS1.3

Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protectiveA.covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color,1.and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4

Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of rollerA.shades similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose workhas resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer.B.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with theC.fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per testmethod indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction:

Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.1.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,D.Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5

Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name,A.fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designationsindicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.6

Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirtyA.finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidityconditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verifyB.dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicatemeasurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operationhardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinatefabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

ROLLER WINDOW SHADESCopyright 2017 Gensler

12 24 13 - 2

Page 200: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of theA.following:

Lutron.1.MechoShade Systems, Inc.2.

MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS2.2

Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch thatA.stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.

Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard .1.

Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.a.Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.b.Chain-Retainer Type: [Clip, jamb mount] [Chain tensioner, jamb mounted]c.[Chain tensioner, sill mounted] <Insert description>.

Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wallB.thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths ofshadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-endassemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with rollerC.assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditionsindicated.

Shadebands:D.

Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric or Light-blocking fabricas indicated on the1.drawings .Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.2.

MOTOR-OPERATED, SINGLE-ROLLER SHADES2.3

Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wallA.thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths ofshadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-endassemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

ROLLER WINDOW SHADESCopyright 2017 Gensler

12 24 13 - 3

Page 201: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Roller Drive-End Location: As indicated on Drawings.1.Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.2.

Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with rollerB.assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditionsindicated.

Shadebands:C.

Shadeband Material: [Light-filtering fabric] [Light-blocking fabric] <Insert1.requirements>.Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.2.

MOTOR-OPERATED, DOUBLE-ROLLER SHADES2.4

Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wallA.thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths ofshadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-endassemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

Double-Roller Mounting Configuration: Side by side.1.Inside Roller:2.

Drive-End Location: As indicated on Drawings.a.Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.b.

Outside Roller:3.

Drive-End Location: As indicated on Drawings.a.Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.b.

Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with rollerB.assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditionsindicated.

Inside Shadebands:C.

Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.1.Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.2.

Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material.a.Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.b.

Outside Shadebands:D.

Shadeband Material: Light-blocking fabric.1.Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.2.

ROLLER WINDOW SHADESCopyright 2017 Gensler

12 24 13 - 4

Page 202: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Type: Exposed with endcaps.a.Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.b.

MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADE OPERATORS2.5

General: Provide factory-assembled motorized shade operation systems designed for liftingA.shades of type, size, weight, construction, use, and operation frequency indicated. Provideoperation systems of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessoriessuitable for Project conditions and recommended by shade manufacturer, complete with electricmotors and factory-prewired motor controls, remote-control stations, remote-control devices,power disconnect switches, enclosures protecting controls and all operating parts, andaccessories required for reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motorcontrols to motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics withthe building electrical system.

Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6 with NFPAB.70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

Electric Motors: UL-approved or -recognized, asynchronous, totally enclosed, insulated,C.capacitor-start motors, complying with NEMA MG 1, with thermal overload protection, brake,permanently lubricated bearings, and limit switches; sized by shade manufacturer to start andoperate size and weight of shade considering service factor or considering Project's serviceconditions without exceeding nameplate ratings.

Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.1.Motor Mounting: Within manufacturer's standard roller enclosure.2.

Position of Motor and Electrical Connection: Right side of roller, as determined by hand ofD.user facing shade from inside, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

Provide control stations with configuration as indicated or as required to control the loads asE.indicated.

Wired Control Stations:F.

General Requirements:1.

Remote Controls: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for recessed or flushG.mounting. Provide the following devices for remote-control activation of shades:

Group Control Stations: Momentary-contact, three-position, rocker-style, wall1.switch-operated control station with open, close, and center off functions forsingle-switch group control.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, providea."Decora Plus" by Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

ROLLER WINDOW SHADESCopyright 2017 Gensler

12 24 13 - 5

Page 203: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis-of-design product, or ab.comparable product, aceptable to the Architect, by one of the following:

Lutron Electronics Co.1)

Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automaticallyH.stop shade at fully raised and fully lowered positions.

Operating Function: Stop and hold shade at three predetermined positions including open,I.closed, and one user-programmed position.

Operating Features: Include the following:J.

Group switching with integrated switch control; single face plate for multiple switch1.cut-outs.Back-up gear and crank operator for manual operation during power failures with2.detachable handle, length required to make operation convenient from floor level.

INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES2.6

Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.A.

SHADEBAND MATERIALS2.7

Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.A.

Light-Blocking Fabric: Opaque fabric, stain and fade resistant.B.

MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADE OPERATORS2.8

General: Provide factory-assembled motorized shade operation systems designed for liftingA.shades of type, size, weight, construction, use, and operation frequency indicated. Provideoperation systems of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessoriessuitable for Project conditions and recommended by shade manufacturer, complete with electricmotors and factory-prewired motor controls, remote-control stations, remote-control devices,power disconnect switches, enclosures protecting controls and all operating parts, andaccessories required for reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motorcontrols to motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics withthe building electrical system.

Comply with NFPA 70.B.

Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6 with NFPAC.70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

ROLLER WINDOW SHADESCopyright 2017 Gensler

12 24 13 - 6

Page 204: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Electric Motors: UL-approved or -recognized, asynchronous, totally enclosed, insulated,D.capacitor-start motors, complying with NEMA MG 1, with thermal overload protection, brake,permanently lubricated bearings, and limit switches; sized by shade manufacturer to start andoperate size and weight of shade considering service factor or considering Project's serviceconditions without exceeding nameplate ratings.

Position of Motor and Electrical Connection: Right side of roller, as determined by hand ofE.user facing shade from inside, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

Provide control stations with configuration as indicated or as required to control the loads asF.indicated.

Remote Controls: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for recessed or flushG.mounting. Provide the following devices for remote-control activation of shades:

Group Control Stations: Momentary-contact, three-position, rocker-style, wall1.switch-operated control station with open, close, and center off functions forsingle-switch group control.

Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Decora Plus" bya.Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. White.

Operating Function: Stop and hold shade at three predetermined positions including open,H.closed, and one user-programmed position.

Operating Features: Include the following:I.

Group switching with integrated switch control; single face plate for multiple switch1.cut-outs.Back-up gear and crank operator for manual operation during power failures with2.detachable handle, length required to make operation convenient from floor level.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withA.requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, [locations of connections tobuilding electrical system, ]and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION3.2

Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer'sA.written instructions.

ROLLER WINDOW SHADESCopyright 2017 Gensler

12 24 13 - 7

Page 205: MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Gensler21.9119.910

MPEA 5TH FLOOR BUILDOUT

Chicago Illinois

Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of1.glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.

Electrical Connections: Connect motor-operated roller shades to building electrical system.B.

Roller Shade Locations: As indicated on Drawings.C.

ADJUSTING3.3

Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding orA.malfunction throughout entire operational range.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.4

Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.A.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer andB.Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time ofSubstantial Completion.

Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,C.before time of Substantial Completion.

DEMONSTRATION3.5

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toA.adjust, operate, and maintain roller window shades. Refer to Division 01 Section "CloseoutProcedures."

END OF SECTION 12 24 13

ROLLER WINDOW SHADESCopyright 2017 Gensler

12 24 13 - 8